null  User manual
Agilent X-Series
Signal Analyzer
This manual provides documentation for the
following X-Series Analyzers:
PXA Signal Analyzer N9030A
MXA Signal Analyzer N9020A
EXA Signal Analyzer N9010A
N9061A
Remote Language
Compatibility Guide
Notices
© Agilent Technologies, Inc. 2008, 2009
Manual Part Number
No part of this manual may be reproduced
in any form or by any means (including
electronic storage and retrieval or translation into a foreign language) without prior
agreement and written consent from Agilent Technologies, Inc. as governed by
United States and international copyright
laws.
N9020-90119
Supersedes: August 2009
October 2009
Printed in USA
Agilent Technologies, Inc.
1400 Fountaingrove Parkway
Santa Rosa, CA 95403
Trademark
Acknowledgements
Microsoft® is a U.S. registered
trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
®
Print Date
®
Windows and MS Windows are
U.S. registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation.
Adobe Reader® is a U.S. registered
trademark of Adobe System
Incorporated.
Java™ is a U.S. trademark of Sun
Microsystems, Inc.
MATLAB® is a U.S. registered
trademark of Math Works, Inc.
Norton Ghost™ is a U.S. trademark
of Symantec Corporation.
Warranty
The material contained in this document is provided “as is,” and is
subject to being changed, without
notice, in future editions. Further,
to the maximum extent permitted
by applicable law, Agilent disclaims all warranties, either
express or implied, with regard to
this manual and any information
contained herein, including but not
limited to the implied warranties of
merchantability and fitness for a
particular purpose. Agilent shall
not be liable for errors or for incidental or consequential damages in
connection with the furnishing, use,
or performance of this document or
of any information contained
herein. Should Agilent and the user
have a separate written agreement
with warranty terms covering the
material in this document that conflict with these terms, the warranty
terms in the separate agreement
shall control.
Technology Licenses
The hardware and/or software described
in this document are furnished under a
license and may be used or copied only in
accordance with the terms of such license.
Restricted Rights Legend
If software is for use in the performance
of a U.S. Government prime contract or
subcontract, Software is delivered and
licensed as “Commercial computer software” as defined in DFAR 252.227-7014
(June 1995), or as a “commercial item” as
defined in FAR 2.101(a) or as “Restricted
computer software” as defined in FAR
52.227-19 (June 1987) or any equivalent
agency regulation or contract clause. Use,
duplication or disclosure of Software is
subject to Agilent Technologies’ standard commercial license terms, and nonDOD Departments and Agencies of the
U.S. Government will receive no greater
than Restricted Rights as defined in FAR
52.227-19(c)(1-2) (June 1987). U.S. Government users will receive no greater than
Limited Rights as defined in FAR 52.22714 (June 1987) or DFAR 252.227-7015
(b)(2) (November 1995), as applicable in
any technical data.
Safety Notices
CAUTION
A CAUTION notice denotes a
hazard. It calls attention to an
operating procedure, practice, or
the like that, if not correctly performed or adhered to, could result
in damage to the product or loss of
important data. Do not proceed
beyond a CAUTION notice until
the indicated conditions are fully
understood and met.
WARNING
A WARNING notice denotes a
hazard. It calls attention to an
operating procedure, practice,
or the like that, if not correctly
performed or adhered to, could
result in personal injury or
death. Do not proceed beyond a
WARNING notice until the
indicated conditions are fully
understood and met.
2
Warranty
This Agilent technologies instrument product is warranted against defects in material and workmanship for
a period of one year from the date of shipment. During the warranty period, Agilent Technologies will, at
its option, either repair or replace products that prove to be defective.
For warranty service or repair, this product must be returned to a service facility designated by Agilent
Technologies. Buyer shall prepay shipping charges to Agilent Technologies and Agilent Technologies
shall pay shipping charges to return the product to Buyer. However, Buyer shall pay all shipping charges,
duties, and taxes for products returned to Agilent Technologies from another country.
Where to Find the Latest Information
Documentation is updated periodically. For the latest information about this analyzer, including firmware
upgrades, application information, and product information, see the following URLs:
http://www.agilent.com/find/pxa
http://www.agilent.com/find/mxa
http://www.agilent.com/find/exa
To receive the latest updates by email, subscribe to Agilent Email Updates:
http://www.agilent.com/find/emailupdates
Information on preventing analyzer damage can be found at:
http://www.agilent.com/find/tips
3
4
Contents
1.
Getting Started
N9061A Application Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Documentation for the N9061A application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
N9061A General Rules and Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Hardware and Firmware Requirements for N9061A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Installing the N9061A application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Setting up N9061A on the X-Series Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Running Software that Requires SCPI Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Service and Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
2.
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
3.
Hints and Tips
Hints and Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
4.
Programming Commands
Command Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Programming Command Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
A1 [one]
Clear Write for Trace A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
A2 [two]
Maximum Hold for Trace A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
A3 [three]
View Mode for Trace A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
A4 [four]
Blank Trace A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
ACPALPHA
Adjacent Channel Power Alpha Weighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
ACPALTCH
Adjacent Channel Power Alternate Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
ACPBRPER
Adjacent Channel Power Burst Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
ACPBRWID
Adjacent Channel Power Burst Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
ACPBW
Adjacent Channel Power Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
ACPCOMPUTE
Adjacent Channel Power Compute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
ACPFRQWT
Adjacent Channel Power Frequency Weighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
ACPLOWER
Lower Adjacent Channel Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
ACPMAX
Maximum Adjacent Channel Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
ACPMEAS
Measure Adjacent Channel Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
ACPMSTATE
5
Contents
Adjacent Channel Power Measurement State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
ACPPWRTX
Adjacent Channel Power Total Power Transmitted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
ACPRSLTS
Adjacent Channel Power Measurement Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
ACPSP
Adjacent Channel Power Channel Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
ACPT
Adjacent Channel Power T Weighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
ACPUPPER
Upper Adjacent Channel Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
ADJALL
LO and IF Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
AMB
A minus B into A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
AMBPL
(A minus B) plus Display Line into A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
ANNOT
Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
APB
Trace A Plus Trace B to A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
AT
Input Attenuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
AUNITS
Absolute Amplitude Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
AUTOCPL
Auto Coupled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
AXB
Exchange Trace A and Trace B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
B1 [one]
Clear Write for Trace B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
B2 [two]
Maximum Hold for Trace B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
B3 [three]
View Mode for Trace B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
B4 [four]
Blank Trace B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
BL
Trace B minus Display Line to Trace B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
BLANK
Blank Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
BML
Trace B Minus Display Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
BTC
Transfer Trace B to Trace C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
BXC
Exchange Trace B and Trace C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
C1 [one]
Set A Minus B Mode Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
6
Contents
C2 [two]
A Minus B Into A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
CA
Couple Attenuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
CARROFF
Carrier Off Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
CARRON
Carrier On Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
CF
Center Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
CHANNEL
Channel Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
CHANPWR
Channel Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
CHPWRBW
Channel Power Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
CLRAVG
Clear Average . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
CLRW
Clear Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
CONTS
Continuous Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
COUPLE
Input Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
CR
Couple Resolution Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
CS
Couple Frequency Step Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
CT
Couple Sweep Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
CV
Couple Video Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
DA
Display Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
DELMKBW
Occupied Power Bandwidth Within Delta Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
DET
Detection Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
DL
Display Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
DLE
Display Line Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
DLYSWP
Delay Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
DONE
Done . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
DR
Display Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
E1[one]
7
Contents
Peak Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E2 [two]
Marker to Center Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E3 [three]
Delta Marker Step Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E4 [four]
Marker to Reference Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EDITDONE
Edit Done . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ERR
Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ET
Elapsed Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EX
Exchange Trace A and Trace B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FA
Start Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FB
Stop Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FDSP
Frequency Display Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FOFFSET
Frequency Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FPKA
Fast Preselector Peak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FREF
Frequency Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FS
Full Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GATE
Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GATECTL
Gate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GD
Gate Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GL
Gate Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GP
Gate Polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GRAT
Graticule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HD
Hold Data Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I1 [one]
Set RF Coupling to DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I2 [two]
Set RF Coupling to AC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ID
Identify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8
147
148
149
150
151
152
154
155
156
157
158
159
161
162
163
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
175
177
Contents
IP
Instrument Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
KS,
Mixer Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
KS=
8566A/B: Automatic Preselector Tracking
8568A/B: Marker Counter Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
KS(
Lock Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
KS)
Unlock Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
KSA
Amplitude in dBm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
KSa
Normal Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
KSB
Amplitude in dBmV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
KSb
Positive Peak Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
KSC
Amplitude in dBuV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
KSc
A Plus B to A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
KSD
Amplitude in Volts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
KSd
Negative Peak Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
KSE
Title Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
KSe
Sample Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
KSG
Video Averaging On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
KSg
Display Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
KSH
Video Averaging Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
KSh
Display On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
KSi
Exchange Trace B and Trace C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
KSj
View Trace C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
KSK
Marker to Next Peak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
KSk
Blank Trace C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
KSL
Marker Noise Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
9
Contents
KSl
Transfer Trace B to Trace C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KSM
Marker Noise On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KSm
Graticule Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KSN
Marker Minimum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KSn
Graticule On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KSO
Marker Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KSo
Annotation Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KSp
Annotation On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KST
Fast Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KSV
Frequency Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KSx
External Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KSy
Video Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KSZ
Reference Level Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
L0 [zero]
Display Line Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LF
Low Frequency Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LG
Logarithmic Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LIMF
Limit Line Frequency Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LIMIFAIL
Limits Failed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LIMIPURGE
Delete Current Limit Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LIMIREL
Relative Limit Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LIML
Lower-Limit Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LIMTSL
Slope Limit Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LIMU
Upper-Limit Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LN
Linear Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M1 [one]
10
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
Contents
Marker Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
M2 [two]
Marker Normal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
M3 [three]
Delta Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
M4 [four]
Marker Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
MA
Marker Amplitude Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
MC0 [zero]
Marker Frequency Counter Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
MC1 [one]
Marker Frequency Counter On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
MDS
Measurement Data Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
MEAN
Trace Mean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
MEANPWR
Mean Power measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
MEAS
Meas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
MF
Marker Frequency Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
MINH
Minimum Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
MINPOS
Minimum X Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
MKA
Marker Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
MKACT
Activate Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
MKBW
Marker Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
MKCF
Marker to Center Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
MKD
Marker Delta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
MKF
Marker Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
MKFC
Marker Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
MKFCR
Marker Counter Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
MKMIN
Marker Minimum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
MKN
Marker Normal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
MKNOISE
Marker Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
11
Contents
MKOFF
Marker Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MKP
Marker Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MKPK
Marker Peak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MKPT
Marker Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MKPX
Marker Peak Excursion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MKREAD
Marker Readout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MKRL
Marker to Reference Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MKSP
Marker Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MKSS
Marker to Step Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MKT
Marker Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MKTRACE
Marker Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MKTRACK
Marker Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MKTYPE
Marker Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ML
Mixer Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MT0 [zero]
Marker Track Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MT1 [one]
Marker Track On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MXMH
Maximum Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NORMLIZE
Normalize Trace Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NRL
Normalized Reference Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NRPOS
Normalized Reference Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
O1 [one]
Format - Display Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
O2 [two]
Format - Two 8-Bit Bytes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
O3 [three]
Format - Real Amplitude Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
O4 [four]
Format - One 8-Bit Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OA or ?
12
253
254
255
256
257
258
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
Contents
Query Active Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
OCCUP
Percent Occupied Power Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
OL
Output Learn String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
OT
Output Trace Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
PEAKS
Peaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
PKPOS
Peak Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
PLOT
Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
PP
Preselector Peak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
PRINT
Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
PWRBW
Power Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
R1 [one]
Illegal Command SRQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
R2 [two]
End-of-Sweep SRQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
R3 [three]
Hardware Broken SRQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
R4 [four]
Units-Key-Pressed SRQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
RB
Resolution Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
RBR
Resolution Bandwidth to Span Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
RC
Recall State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
RCLS
Recall State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
REV
Revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
RL
Reference Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
RMS
Root Mean Square Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
ROFFSET
Reference Level Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
RQS
Request Service Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
S1[one]
Continuous Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
S2 [two]
Single Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
13
Contents
SAVES
Save State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SER
Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SETDATE
Set Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SETTIME
Set Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SMOOTH
Smooth Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SNGLS
Single Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP
Frequency Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRQ
Service Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SS
Center Frequency Step Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ST
Sweep Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STB
Status Byte Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STDEV
Standard Deviation of Trace Amplitudes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SUM
Sum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SV
Save State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SWPCPL
Sweep Couple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
T1 [one]
Free Run Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
T2 [two]
Line Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
T3 [three]
External Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
T4 [four]
Video Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TA
Trace A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TB
Trace B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TDF
Trace Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TH
Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
THE
Threshold Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TIMEDATE
14
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
316
317
318
320
321
322
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
Contents
Time Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
TITLE
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
TM
Trigger Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
TRA
Trace Data Input and Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
TRB
Trace Data Input and Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
TRC
Trace Data Input and Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
TRDSP
Trace Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
TRIGPOL
Trigger Polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
TRSTAT
Trace State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
TS
Take Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
VAVG
Video Average . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
VB
Video Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
VBO
Video Bandwidth Coupling Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
VBR
Video Bandwidth to Resolution Bandwidth Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
VIEW
View Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
VTL
Video Trigger Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
XCH
Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
5.
A Brief Introduction to the SCPI Language
SCPI Language Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
15
Contents
16
1
Getting Started
17
Getting Started
N9061A Application Description
N9061A Application Description
The N9061A application is the remote language compatibility suite for the Agilent Technologies
X-Series of signal analyzers. It allows the analyzers to be controlled using many of the remote
programming commands from the following analyzers:
•
8560 E/EC Series Portable Spectrum Analyzers, comprising:
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
8560E
8560EC
8561E
8561EC
8562E
8562EC
8563E
8563EC
8564E
8564EC
8565E
8565EC
•
8566A/B
•
8568A/B
NOTE
The 8566A/B and the 8568A/B are not considered part of the 8560 series of
analyzers.
The X-Series analyzer with the N9061A application installed is designed to replace these analyzers in
many automated systems with minimal or no modification to the currently used measurement software.
There are two options for N9061A. One is N9061A-1FP, 8566A/B and 8568A/B remote language
compatibility, the other is N9061A-2FP, 8560 Series remote language compatibility.
18
Getting Started
Documentation for the N9061A application
Documentation for the N9061A application
Signal Analyzers with N9061A
When you purchase your X-Series signal analyzer with the Remote Language Compatibility Suite
(N9061A), this manual - the Remote Language Compatibility Guide (N9020-90119) is included on the
documentation CD and is installed on the analyzer in the online help.
For information on PXA series analyzers and other related documentation, refer to the PXA web site at
http://www.agilent.com/find/pxa.
For information on MXA series analyzers and other related documentation, refer to the MXA web site at
http://www.agilent.com/find/mxa/.
For information on EXA series analyzers and other related documentation, refer to the EXA web site at
http://www.agilent.com/find/exa/.
This Remote Language Compatibility Guide is not designed to be a comprehensive guide to all legacy
commands. It gives brief descriptions of the supported commands, and highlights important functional or
behavioral differences that you should be aware of when transferring your existing code to your X-Series
analyzer. For a fuller description of these commands, refer to the manuals supplied with your original
analyzer.
Signal Analyzer Updates
For the latest information about this instrument, including software upgrades, application information,
and product information, please visit the URL below.
http://www.agilent.com/find/pxa/
http://www.agilent.com/find/mxa/
http://www.agilent.com/find/exa/
19
Getting Started
N9061A General Rules and Limitations
N9061A General Rules and Limitations
The N9061A application has been designed to emulate as closely as possible the operation of the
specified spectrum analyzers. It is not, however, intended as an absolute direct replacement for these
analyzers.
Remote Control
The N9061A application in X-Series signal analyzers supports remote operation through the GPIB
interface. It does not support working over LAN, USB or Telnet.
Units
The N9061A application supports all units used in legacy products. The allowed units are HZ, KHZ,
MHZ, GHZ, KZ, MZ, GZ, DBM, DBMV, DBUV, MV, UV, V, MW, UW, W, DB, DM, MS, US, SC,
and S (case insensitive in 8566/68). A command terminator such as ";" also acts as a unit terminator.
Numeric Ranges
Numeric ranges are limited to that of the X-Series unless otherwise stated, although commands such as
FS or IP that go to a default range will use the range of the legacy instrumentation.
Returning Data
The X-Series and legacy instruments have a different approach when returning data to the controller.
The X-Series and 8560-series analyzers operate a FIFO buffer for command return values. If a command
returns a value that the controller does not read, the returned data is stored until such a time that the
controller requires the value. The 8566, 8568, and 8590-series legacy analyzers only store one value at a
time. Any value stored is overwritten each time a command returns a value. The N9071A application
handles this difference appropriately only within a single command string.
In the case of query string, it returns the query result for the last command in the string. For example, if
"CF?MA?FA?" is sent, the result of FA? will be returned. However, this rule does not work if the query
is located at both sides of the "TS" command. When the command string "MA;TS;CF?" is sent, the result
of CF? will be returned in the next query.
AC/DC Coupling
The 44 GHz and 50 GHz X-Series analyzers only have DC coupling. The X-Series analyzers with a 26.5
GHz frequency range and lower, default to AC coupling on preset. The N9061A application will ensure
that DC coupling is the default when the selected instrument is HP8566A, HP8566B, HP8563, HP8564,
or HP8565.
When AC coupled, the 8560E/61E/62E have a 100 kHz low frequency limit, while the X-Series
analyzers has a 10 MHz limit.
For HP8568A/B compatibility and consistency, the I1 and I2 commands have been supported. These
select AC or DC coupling at the RF input. Note tht the HP8568A/B has two RF input ports in
comparison with the X-Series, which only has one.
20
Getting Started
N9061A General Rules and Limitations
Markers
The N9071A application emulates the behavior of legacy products. If someone uses a marker state which
is not available in the legacy instrument, further marker behavior is undefined until instrument preset.
On systems that supported MKACT, there are 4 completely different marker pairs, each with its own
information. The N9061A will store the currently active value of MKACT. If MKACT is 2 then it will
use Markers 3 and 4 instead of 1 and 2.
Parsing
For 8566B and 8568B, the N9061A will remember the active function and supports UP, DN, and OA, all
of which change the active function. It also supports '?', which does not change the active function.
One difference between N9061A and 8566/68 is that the 8566/68 parses a command for example CF
10.3GZ, immediately when it recognizes a complete command, in this example after the GZ. However
the N9061A parses at the end of a line when it sees the line termination sequence.
Couplings
To provide the most optimized use of the X-Series analyzers, the N9061A application uses the auto
coupling features of the X-Series analyzers and does not attempt to mimic the exact behavior of coupling
in the legacy analyzers. To eliminate the possibilities of "Meas Uncal" errors between auto and manual
values, values will default to the X-Series auto settings where applicable (for example resolution
bandwidth). There are several exceptions below.
To prevent timeout errors in the legacy code, the resolution bandwidth minimum matches the minimum
in the legacy analyzer. Resolution bandwidth steps and resolution, however, will be X-Series values.
The video bandwidth will couple to the resolution bandwidth according to the Video bandwidth coupling
offset value, specified by the VBO or VBR command. The X-Series analyzers sets the video bandwidth
according to the VBO or VBR setting, but uses the X-Series analyzers available bandwidths to prevent
'Meas Uncal' errors.
Predefined Functions
In the 8566/8568/8560 Series analyzers, a “predefined function” is an analyzer command that returns a
number that can be operated on by other analyzer commands. “Predefined variables” follow the same
idea, except the value to be passed as a parameter to the next command is stored in a variable.
The N9061A application does not support this type of behavior, so any commands that originally acted
as predefined functions or variables, or that allowed predefined functions or variables as arguments in
the 8566/8568/8560 Series no longer do so.
User-defined Functions
No user-defined functions, traces, or variables (FUNCDEF, TRDEF or VARDEF) can be used as
arguments or commands in programs controlling any analyzer running the N9061A application. In
addition, the behavior of certain commands that rely on the “active functions” (UP, DN, etc.) may be
slightly different.
21
Getting Started
N9061A General Rules and Limitations
Supported Commands
Only a subset of the 8566/8568/8560 Series commands is supported in this application (through a GPIB
interface). The list of supported commands was determined by feedback from our customers combined
with technical considerations and constraints.
EP is the enable parameter in the 8560 series that, when used as a secondary keyword after a command,
transfers control and allows front panel operator entry. This command is supported in the N9061A
application for the same active functions as the 8560 series, but is not displayed in any of the format
diagrams for individual commands.
The N9061A application supports the OA parameter that is found in several legacy commands such as
AT and CF. OA is the equivalent of a query so that “CF OA” has a return value equivalent to “CF?”.
Device clear is supported by the N9061A application and causes a mode preset of the signal analyzer.
Unsupported Commands and Queries
If a command is valid for legacy products but not supported by the N9061A application, there will be no
error message generated, although the Command Log file will note a "Command Not Supported"
comment. Note that this logging behavior can be controlled via the preferences menu.
If a query is valid for legacy products but not supported by the N9061A application, it will return a "0"
over the GPIB bus to prevent a program from hanging.
22
Getting Started
Hardware and Firmware Requirements for N9061A
Hardware and Firmware Requirements for N9061A
One of the following Agilent signal analyzers is required to run the N9061A application.
Table 1-1
Compatible Agilent PXA Series Signal Analyzers
Analyzer Model
Number
Upper Frequency Limit
Firmware
N9030A-503
3.6 GHz
Rev A.04.00 or later
N9030A-508
8.4 GHz
Rev A.04.00 or later
N9030A-513
13.6 GHz
Rev A.04.00 or later
N9030A-526
26.5 GHz
Rev A.04.00 or later
Table 1-2
Compatible Agilent MXA Series Signal Analyzers
Analyzer Model
Number
Upper Frequency Limit
Firmware
N9020A-503
3.6 GHz
Rev A.01.64 or later
N9020A-508
8.4 GHz
Rev A.01.64 or later
N9020A-513
13.6 GHz
Rev A.01.64 or later
N9020A-526
26.5 GHz
Rev A.01.64 or later
Table 1-3
Compatible Agilent EXA Series Signal Analyzers
Analyzer Model
Number
Upper Frequency Limit
Firmware
N9010A-503
3.6 GHz
Rev A.01.64 or later
N9010A-507
7 GHz
Rev A.01.64 or later
N9010A-513
13.6 GHz
Rev A.01.64 or later
N9010A-526
26.5 GHz
Rev A.01.64 or later
For maximum compatibility, you should select an X-Series analyzer that equals or exceeds the frequency
range of the legacy analyzer you are replacing (currently not possible for the 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC).
The frequency limits of the legacy instruments are listed below.
Table 1-4
Frequency Ranges of the Legacy Analyzers
Remote Language
Start Frequency
Stop Frequency
8560E/EC
30 Hz
2.9 GHz
8561E/EC
30 Hz
6.5 GHz
23
Getting Started
Hardware and Firmware Requirements for N9061A
Table 1-4
Frequency Ranges of the Legacy Analyzers
Remote Language
Start Frequency
Stop Frequency
8562E/EC
30 Hz
13.2 GHz
8563E/EC
9 kHz
26.5 GHz
8564E/EC
9 kHz
40.0 GHz
8565E/EC
9 kHz
50.0 GHz
HP8566A
2 GHz
22 GHz
HP8566B
2 GHz
22 GHz
HP8568A
0 Hz
1.5 GHz
HP8568B
0 Hz
1.5 GHz
24
Getting Started
Installing the N9061A application
Installing the N9061A application
Remote language compatibility for the 8566/8568/8560 Series of analyzers is a licensed application on
the X-Series analyzers. The option for 8560 series is N9061A-2FP and the option for 8566/8568 is
N9061A-1FP. The application must be installed and licensed on the X-Series analyzer (PXA, MXA,
EXA but not CXA) for it to work correctly.
Installation
The license is installed on the X-Series analyzer in one of the following ways:
•
If you purchased a new X-Series analyzer with the N9061A application then the product is installed
and licensed and ready to use.
•
If you have an X-Series analyzer and have subsequently purchased the N9061A application then you
can download the N9061A application from the Agilent website. The N9061A application is installed
as part of a software upgrade. See the link below for Signal Analyzers software upgrade site. After
upgrading your software you should then use your entitlement certificate to license the product (see
Licensing below).
The latest revision of the software may be downloaded from:
http://www.agilent.com/find/pxa_software
http://www.agilent.com/find/mxa_software
http://www.agilent.com/find/exa_software
NOTE
No calibration is required after the N9061A application is installed.
Licensing
When you order a licensed product, you receive an entitlement certificate. Instructions are provided on
your entitlement certificate to direct you to the Web site to redeem your certificate for a license key. You
need to provide your instrument product number and serial number, and the entitlement certificate
number.
Required Information:
Front Panel Key Path:
Model #: (Ex. N9020A)
Instrument
Serial Number:
__________________
System > Show > System
The license is downloaded from the license website onto a USB storage device so that it can be loaded
into the instrument.
25
Getting Started
Installing the N9061A application
A license key is usually for one instrument model/serial number combination. The license key can only
be installed on that instrument.
License Installation Procedure over USB
1. Redeem the Option Upgrade Entitlement Certificate by following the instructions on the Certificate.
2. After redeeming your Option Upgrade Entitlement Certificate you will receive an e-mail with an
attached License File.
3. Locate a USB storage device and save the .lic file to the root directory of the USB storage device.
4. Connect the USB storage device to one of the signal analyzer USB ports. Windows detects the new
hardware and may display the configuration menu. This menu may be configured according to your
preferences.
5. The signal analyzer automatically consumes the license file. (This may take a few minutes) When the
license is consumed the Agilent License Manager displays a “Successful License Installation”
message.
6. Alternatively the license file can be manually installed over USB or LAN by placing the license file
in the following folder on the signal analyzer.
C:\Program Files\Agilent\licensing
Verify the Installation
1. Press System > Show > System to display the list of installed applications.
2. Verify that the new application appears in the list.
If you require further assistance, please contact the Agilent support team.
Online assistance: http://www.agilent.com/find/assist
If you do not have access to the Internet, contact your local Agilent Technologies Sales and Service
Office, or if in the United States, call 1-800-829-4444.
26
Getting Started
Setting up N9061A on the X-Series Analyzer
Setting up N9061A on the X-Series Analyzer
Figure 1-1 is an example mode menu map showing the N9061A (Remote Language Compatibility)
application selection on your signal analyzer. To select the N9061A application, press the Mode hardkey
on the X-Series analyzer front panel and then select the Remote Language Compatibility mode. If
there are more than six modes on the signal analyzer, then use the More button to find the Remote
Language Compatibility selection.
Figure 1-1
Example Mode Menu Map for X-Series Analyzers
Mode
Mode
Spectrum
Analyzer
IQ Analyzer
(BASIC)
W-CDMA with
HSDPA/PSUPPA
Phase Noise
Remote
Language
Compatibility
27
Getting Started
Setting up N9061A on the X-Series Analyzer
Then, to select the legacy analyzer you wish to emulate, press the Mode Setup hardkey on the front
panel. Figure 1-2 shows the menu map that allows you to select the 8560 series analyzer or 8566A/B,
8568A/B and therefore the remote control commands to be used in the X-Series analyzer.
Figure 1-2
Mode Setup > Legacy Instrument Selection Menu Map
Mode Setup
HP8560 Series
HP8560E/EC
Mode Setup
HP8561E/EC
HP8560 series
HP8562E/EC
HP8563E/EC
HP8563E/EC
HP8564E/EC
HP8566/68
HP8566/68
HP8566B
Cmd Error
On
Off
Logging
Preferences
HP8565E/EC
HP8566A
HP8566B
HP8568A
HP8568B
Logging
Preferences
Restore Mode
Defaults
The HP8560 series and HP8566A/B, 8568A/B key allow you to select which legacy instrument to
emulate. The selected instrument determines the response to the “ID?” command and affects the
behavior of commands such as IP. You can use any command offered by any of the legacy instruments
regardless of the language setting. However, if the command is not correct for the selected legacy
instrument there is no guarantee that the command will work as expected. This does not affect the
response to the SCPI command “*IDN?”.
28
Getting Started
Setting up N9061A on the X-Series Analyzer
The legacy instrument selections are as follows:
8560E/EC
Selects the 8560E/EC remote programming language and sets the response to the
remote programming command ‘ID?’ to HP8560E. It also performs an instrument
preset and sets Span, Trace Points, couplings, VBW/RBW ratio, and Span/RBW ratio
appropriately as shown in Table 1-5.
8561E/EC
Selects the 8561E/EC remote programming language and sets the response to the
remote programming command ‘ID?’ to HP8561E. It also performs an instrument
preset and sets Span, Trace Points, couplings, VBW/RBW ratio, and Span/RBW ratio
appropriately as shown in Table 1-5.
8562E/EC
Selects the 8562E/EC remote programming language and sets the response to the
remote programming command ‘ID?’ to HP8562E. It also performs an instrument
preset and sets Span, Trace Points, couplings, VBW/RBW ratio, and Span/RBW ratio
appropriately as shown in Table 1-5.
8563E/EC
Selects the 8563E/EC remote programming language and sets the response to the
remote programming command ‘ID?’ to HP8563E. It also performs an instrument
preset and sets Span, Trace Points, couplings, VBW/RBW ratio, and Span/RBW ratio
appropriately as shown in Table 1-5. This is the default setting for the N9061A
application.
8564E/EC
Selects the 8564E/EC remote programming language and sets the response to the
remote programming command ‘ID?’ to HP8564E. It also performs an instrument
preset and sets Span, Trace Points, couplings, VBW/RBW ratio, and Span/RBW ratio
appropriately as shown in Table 1-5.
8565E/EC
Selects the 8565E/EC remote programming language and sets the response to the
remote programming command ‘ID?’ to HP8565E. It also performs an instrument
preset and sets Span, Trace Points, couplings, VBW/RBW ratio, and Span/RBW ratio
appropriately as shown in Table 1-5.
HP8566A
Selects the HP8566A remote programming language and sets the response to the
remote programming command ‘ID?’ to HP8566A. It also performs an instrument
preset and sets Span, Trace Points, couplings, VBW/RBW ratio, and Span/RBW ratio
appropriately as shown in Table 1-5 on page 30.
HP8566B
Selects the HP8566B remote programming language and sets the response to the
remote programming command ‘ID?’ to HP8566B. It also performs an instrument
preset and sets Span, Trace Points, couplings, VBW/RBW ratio, and Span/RBW ratio
appropriately as shown in Table 1-5 on page 30.
HP8568A
Selects the HP8568A remote programming language and sets the response to the
remote programming command ‘ID?’ to HP8568A. It also performs an instrument
preset and sets Span, Trace Points, couplings, VBW/RBW ratio, and Span/RBW ratio
appropriately as shown in Table 1-5 on page 30.
HP8568B
Selects the HP8568B remote programming language and sets the response to the
remote programming command ‘ID?’ to HP8568B. It also performs an instrument
preset and sets Span, Trace Points, couplings, VBW/RBW ratio, and Span/RBW ratio
appropriately as shown in Table 1-5 on page 30.
29
Getting Started
Setting up N9061A on the X-Series Analyzer
NOTE
Setting the remote language to anything other than ‘SCPI’ does not affect the
response to the SCPI command ‘*IDN?’ This command will still return the model
number and firmware version number of the X-Series signal analyzer.
Table 1-5
Span, Trace Points, Couplings, VBW/RBW Ratio, and Span/RBW Ratio
Settings
Remote
Language
Start Freq.
Stop
Freq.
Number of
Trace
Points
RF
Coupling
VBW/
RBW
Ratio
Span/RBW
Ratio
8560E/EC
30 Hz
2.9 GHz
601
AC
1
91
8561E/EC
30 Hz
6.5 GHz
601
AC
1
91
8562E/EC
30 Hz
13.2 GHz
601
AC
1
91
8563E/EC
30 Hz
26.5 GHz
601
DC
1
91
8564E/EC
30 Hz
40 GHz
601
DC
1
91
8565E/EC
30 Hz
50 GHz
601
DC
1
91
HP8566A
2 GHz
22 GHz
1001
DC
3
106
(VBW
one
step
wider
than
RBW)
HP8566B
2 GHz
22 GHz
1001
DC
3
106
(VBW
one
step
wider
than
RBW)
HP8568A
0 Hz
1.5 GHz
1001
DC
3
(VBW
one
step
wider
than
RBW)
30
106
Getting Started
Setting up N9061A on the X-Series Analyzer
Table 1-5
Span, Trace Points, Couplings, VBW/RBW Ratio, and Span/RBW Ratio
Settings
Remote
Language
Start Freq.
Stop
Freq.
Number of
Trace
Points
RF
Coupling
VBW/
RBW
Ratio
Span/RBW
Ratio
HP8568B
0 Hz
1.5 GHz
1001
DC
3
106
(VBW
one
step
wider
than
RBW)
31
Getting Started
Setting up N9061A on the X-Series Analyzer
Cmd Error
Turning Cmd Error On or Off enables or disables the display of the "CMD ERR" error messages. The
default setting is On. The error message appears in the Message bar and also can be queried using
“ERR?”. The error message will occur if either the command syntax or any of its parameters are
incorrectly formed. The selected value is preserved after presetting or power cycling the instrument.
Disabling the display of command errors disables the display of all error types.
The format of the errors are as follows:
1.CMD ERR, <string>
This string will be limited to the first 20 characters of the input string (message unit).
Further details of these errors, after they have occurred, can be reviewed in the Cmd Error Log, as long
as Cmd Error Logging is enabled.
32
Getting Started
Setting up N9061A on the X-Series Analyzer
Logging
The N9061A application allows the logging of errors. These errors comprise details of command errors
and legacy commands that have been received but are not supported by the N9061A application. To
enable and view the error log select the Mode Setup hardkey from the front panel. Then select the
Logging softkey.
Figure 1-3
Logging Menu Map
Logging
Logging
Previous Page
Next Page
Cmd Error Log
On
Off
Refresh
Clear Log
Previous Page/Next Page
When you are in the Logging menu, the main Signal Analysis display is obscured by the logging page.
The most recent log starts from the bottom of the window. Previous Page and Next Page allow you to
scroll through the log file. To include commands sent to the analyzer since the log window display was
opened, press Refresh.
Cmd Error Log
The Cmd Error Log option allows you to turn the command error logging on or off. The default is Off.
Logging should not be used in a secure environment. When set to On, all error messages are stored in a
log file, regardless of whether they have been displayed on the screen. When set to Off, no further
command error messages are written to the log file. Switching Cmd Error Log to Off does not clear the
log file.
The log file is also stored as a text file, called Logfile.txt, on the instrument. It is stored in the D:\
drive, in a folder called \User_My_Documents\[USERNAME]\My Documents\RLC\data.
The maximum size of the log is 10 MB. When the file reaches its maximum size, the first ten percent of
the file is automatically discarded, to clear space for subsequent error messages.
33
Getting Started
Setting up N9061A on the X-Series Analyzer
Refresh
To update the log page with new entries, select Refresh.
Clear Log
The Clear Log softkey clears the error log.
The log can only be cleared by using the Clear Log function and cannot be cleared on power-up, remote
language switch or mode switch.
34
Getting Started
Setting up N9061A on the X-Series Analyzer
Preferences
The Preferences menu allows you to configure some analyzer settings when in remote language
compatibility mode. Figure 1-4 shows the Preferences menu map that is accessed by selecting the Mode
Setup hardkey on the front panel and then selecting the Preferences softkey. Preferences are not
affected by a power cycle, a remote language change, a mode switching or a mode preset. They are only
preset to their default state using Restore Mode Defaults key in the Mode Setup menu (see Figure 1-2),
INST:DEF or SYST:PRES:PERS command.
Figure 1-4
Preferences Menu Map
Preferences
Preferences
Limit RBW/VBW
On
Off
Atten Offset
On
Swp Type Rules
Off
SwpType Rule
Legacy
RF Coupling
As Legacy
Limit
Allow
SwpSCPI
Time
On
On
Off
Off
Auto
AC/DC Mode
As Legacy
Always
DC Coupled
Always
Best Dynamic
Range
Best Speed
Legacy
AC Coupled
Limit RBW/VBW
Setting Limit RBW/VBW to On limits the valid resolution bandwidth (RBW) and video bandwidth
(VBW) values to those appropriate for the currently selected remote language. While this limitation
reduces measurement flexibility, it helps to ensure that the measurement time in emulation mode is the
same as the legacy measurement time, and ensures that the responses to RB? and VB? match the legacy
instrument. The default state is Off. Setting this key to Off causes the RBW and VBW filters to use the
X-Series analyzer range of values for all remote languages.
Atten Offset
Setting Atten Offset to On allows larger input power to be applied to the analyzer, while significantly
increasing the noise floor. Since many of the older spectrum analyzers had noise floor 10 dB higher than
the X-Series analyzer, this gives the most accurate emulation. The default state is Off.
35
Getting Started
Setting up N9061A on the X-Series Analyzer
Sweep Type Rules
Sweep Type Rules changes the Auto rules for determining whether the instrument uses FFT or Swept
mode (this can be manually overridden). FFT mode offers substantially faster measurements in some
cases. The HP8566A/B, 8568A/B series did not have FFT mode capability, so most accurate emulation
requires that the instrument preserves Swept mode unless you manually overrides that setting. The
8560-series analyzers use both FFT and Swept mode, in which case “Legacy” is equivalent to “Dynamic
range”.
RF Coupling
RF Coupling allows you to override the legacy instrument behavior for AC and DC coupling. This
command is required because legacy instruments had AC cutoff frequencies of 100 kHz and the X-series
analyzers have an AC cutoff frequency of 10 MHz.
As Legacy sets coupling to AC or DC whenever the legacy instrument would be set to AC or DC
coupled mode via power on, preset, or an explicit command. Due to changes in the coupling cutoff
frequency, measurement performance below 10 MHz while in AC-coupled mode may not match the
legacy analyzer performance.
Always AC sets AC coupling while in Language Compatibility Mode, overriding other instrument
settings including power on, preset, or an explicit command. This setting maximizes instrument
robustness, and is recommended for instruments that are not used to measure signals below 10 MHz.
Always DC sets DC coupling while in Language Compatibility Mode, overriding other instrument
settings including power on, preset, or explicit command. This will maximize instrument sensitivity to
signals below 10 MHz, and may be required for measurements between 100 KHz and 10 MHz. When in
this mode, extra care should be taken to ensure that DC voltage levels are within the allowable range for
the X-Series analzysers.
Limit Sweep Time
Allows you to constrain the sweep time to no less than the minimum sweep time of the legacy
instruments. If set to On, the sweep time will be constrained to no less than the value listed below. If set
to Off, no constraint is applied.
Table 1-6
Minimum Sweep Time for the Legacy Instruments
Instrument
Sweep Time
(None Zero Span)
Sweep Time
(Zero Span)
HP8566A/B, HP8568A/B
20 ms
1 us
HP8560 series
50 ms
50 us
36
Getting Started
Setting up N9061A on the X-Series Analyzer
Restore Mode Defaults
Resets the state for the currently active mode by resetting the mode persistent setting to their default
values and by performing a mode preset. This function will never cause a mode switch. This function
performs a full preset on the active mode.
Send Commands
After you finish setting up the N9061A application, you can send the commands of the legacy products
(8560 Series, 8566A/B, or 8568A/B) to X-Series analyzers. It is recomanded to use Agilent 82357B
USB/GPIB interface and free instrument to PC connection tool Agilent IO Libraries Suite when you
connct the instrument to a PC. For more details, visit:
http://www.agilent.com/find/82357B
http://www.agilent.com/find/iolib
NOTE
The commands can ONLY be sent via a GPIB connection. It will not work for a
LAN connecttion.
37
Getting Started
Running Software that Requires SCPI Commands
Running Software that Requires SCPI Commands
When a legacy remote language has been selected, you only have access to a very small subset of SCPI
commands. If you are not familiar with the SCPI remote programming language, Chapter 5 , “A Brief
Introduction to the SCPI Language,” on page 355 contains some useful information.
The SCPI commands available while using other remote languages are:
Table 1-7
SCPI Commands
SCPI Commands
Description
*IDN?
Queries and returns the instrument identification
string.
*RST
Performs an instrument preset.
INSTrument:DEFault
Restores mode defaults.
INSTrument:SELect
Selects an application by mode name. (Use RLC
to select the N9061A application)1.
INSTrument:SELect?
INSTrument:NSELect
Selects an application by mode number. (Use 266
to select the N9061A application)1.
INSTrument:NSELect?
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TYPE AUTO|SWEep|FFT
Sets the Sweep Type.
Defaults to AUTO.
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TYPE?
:SYSTem:OPTions?
Returns a list of installed options.
INPut:COUPling AC|DC|RLC
Sets the input coupling.2
Defaults to RLC.
INPut:COUPling?
:SYSTem:LANGuage HP8560E | HP8561E | HP8562E |
HP8563E | HP8564E | HP8565E | HP8566A | HP8566B |
HP8568A | HP8568B
Sets the current remote language.2
:SYSTem:LANGuage?
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:RLBC:SCPI:ENABle ON|OFF
Toggles whether SCPI available in RLBC mode
or not.
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:RLBC:SCPI:ENABle ON|OFF
Toggles whether SCPI available in RLBC mode
or not.
[:SENSe]:RLC:SWEep:TYPE:AUTO:RULes
AUTO|SPEed|DRANge|LEGACY
Sets the auto rule setting for Sweep Type.2
[:SENSe]:RLC:SWEep:TYPE:AUTO:RULes?
38
Getting Started
Running Software that Requires SCPI Commands
Table 1-7
SCPI Commands
SCPI Commands
Description
[:SENSe]:RLC:BANDwidth:LIMit ON|OFF|1|0
Toggles legacy bandwidth limiting on and off.2
[:SENSe]:RLC:BANDwidth:LIMit?
[:SENSe]:RLC:ATTenuation:STATe ON|OFF|1|0
Toggles internal attenuation on and off.2 Defaults
to OFF.
[:SENSe]:RLC:ATTenuation:STATe?
1. After changing into or out of RLC mode, allow a 1s delay before sending subsequent commands.
2. This command is only available if the N9061A application is installed on your analyzer.
39
Getting Started
Service and Calibration
Service and Calibration
Since the Performance Verification and Adjustment Software uses the SCPI command language, you
need to exit the N9061A (RLC) application and change to the Spectrum Analyzer application prior to
calibration or service of your Agilent signal analyzer.
40
2
Legacy Analyzer Command List
41
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
The following table lists all of the original programming commands from the legacy analyzers (that is,
the 8566A/B, the 8568A/B, and the 8560 Series), and indicates which are supported in N9061A. Refer to
the alphabetical listing of commands in Chapter 4 , “Programming Commands,” on page 75 for more
detailed information about each supported command.
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their N9061A Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
Page for
Further
Details
A1
Clear-writes trace A
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 79
A2
Max Holds trace A
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 80
A3
View trace A
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 81
A4
Blanks trace A
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 82
ABORT
Interrupt operation of all
user-defined functions
N/A
N/A
No
ABS
Absolute
No
No
No
ACP
Performs the adjacent channel
power measurement
N/A
N/A
N/A
ACPACCL
Accelerate adjacent channel
power measurement
N/A
N/A
No
ACPALPHA
Adjacent channel power alpha
weighting
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 83
ACPALTCH
Adjacent channel power
alternate channels
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 84
ACPBRPER
Adjacent channel power burst
period
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 85
ACPBRWID
Adjacent channel power burst
width
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 86
ACPBW
Specifies channel bandwidth for
ACP measurement
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 87
ACPCOMPUTE
Compute adjacent channel
power
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 88
ACPCONTM
Performs ACP measurement in
continuous sweep
N/A
N/A
N/A
ACPE
Adjacent channel power
extended
N/A
N/A
N/A
42
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their N9061A Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
Page for
Further
Details
ACPERR
ACP measurement error query
N/A
N/A
N/A
ACPFRQWT
Adjacent channel power
frequency weighting
N/A
N/A
Yes
ACPGR
Adjacent channel power graph
on or off
N/A
N/A
N/A
ACPGRAPH
Compute adjacent channel
power graph
N/A
N/A
No
ACPLOWER
Lower adjacent channel power
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 90
ACPMAX
Maximum adjacent channel
power
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 91
ACPMEAS
Measure adjacent channel
power
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 92
ACPMETHOD
Adjacent channel power
measurement method
N/A
N/A
No
ACPMK
Adjacent channel power marker
on or off
N/A
N/A
N/A
ACPMSTATE
Adjacent channel power
measurement state
N/A
N/A
Yes
ACPPAR
ACP manual or auto
N/A
N/A
N/A
ACPPWRTX
Total power transmitted
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 94
ACPRSLTS
Adjacent channel power
measurement results
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 95
ACPSNGLM
Performs ACP measurement in
single sweep
N/A
N/A
N/A
ACPSP
Channel spacing
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 96
ACPT
Adjacent channel power
T weighting
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 97
ACPUPPER
Upper adjacent channel power
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 98
ACTDEF
Give user-defined function
active status
N/A
N/A
N/A
ACTVF
Active function
N/A
N/A
N/A
ACTVFUNC
Creates a user defined active
function
N/A
N/A
No
Page 89
Page 93
43
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their N9061A Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
ADD
Add
No
No
No
ADJALL
LO & IF adjustment
N/A
N/A
Yes
ADJCRT
Adjust CRT alignment
N/A
N/A
No
ADJIF
Adjust IF
N/A
N/A
No
AMB
Trace A − trace B -> trace A
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 100
AMBPL
Trace A − trace B + Display
Line -> trace A
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 101
AMPCOR
Applies amplitude correction at
specified frequencies
N/A
N/A
No
AMPCORDATA
Amplitude correction data
N/A
N/A
No
AMPCORSAVE
Save amplitude correction data
N/A
N/A
No
AMPCORSIZE
Amplitude correction data array
size
N/A
N/A
No
AMPCORRCL
Amplitude correction recall
N/A
N/A
No
AMPLEN
Amplitude correction length
N/A
N/A
N/A
ANLGPLUS
Turns on or off the Analog+
display mode
N/A
N/A
N/A
ANNOT
Display Annotation
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 102
APB
Trace A + trace B -> trace A
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 103
ARRAYDEF
Defines an array
N/A
N/A
No
AT
Input Attenuation
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 104
AUNITS
Amplitude Units
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 106
AUTO
Auto couple
N/A
N/A
N/A
AUTOCPL
Auto couple
N/A
N/A
Yes
AUTOEXEC
Turns on or off the function
defined with AUTOFUNC
N/A
N/A
No
AUTOFUNC
Defines a function for automatic
execution
N/A
N/A
No
AUTOSAVE
Automatically saves trace
N/A
N/A
No
AVG
Average
No
No
No
AXB
Exchange Traces A & B
Yes
Yes
Yes
44
Page for
Further
Details
Page 99
Page 108
Page 109
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their N9061A Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
Page for
Further
Details
B1
Clear-writes trace B
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 110
B2
Max Holds trace B
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 111
B3
View trace B
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 112
B4
Blanks trace B
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 113
BAUDRATE
Baud rate of spectrum analyzer
N/A
N/A
N/A
BIT
Return or receive state of bit
N/A
N/A
N/A
BITF
Bit flag
N/A
N/A
N/A
BL
Trace B − Display line -> trace
B
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 114
BLANK
Blanks specified trace
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 115
BML
Trace B − Display line -> trace
B
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 116
BRD
Bus Read
No
No
N/A
BTC
Transfer trace B to C
Yes
Yes
N/A
BWR
Bus Write
No
No
N/A
BXC
Exchange Traces B & C
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 118
C1
Turns off A - B
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 119
C2
A − B -> A
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 120
CA
Couples Attenuation
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 121
CAL
Calibrate
N/A
N/A
N/A
CARDLOAD
Copies data from memory card
to module memory
N/A
N/A
No
CARDSTORE
Copies data to memory card
N/A
N/A
No
CARROFF
Carrier off power
N/A
N/A
No
CARRON
Carrier on power
N/A
N/A
Yes
CAT
Catalog
N/A
N/A
N/A
CATALOG
Catalog
N/A
N/A
No
CF
Center Frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 124
CHANNEL
Channel selection
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 126
Page 117
Page 123
45
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their N9061A Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
Page for
Further
Details
CHANPWR
Channel power
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 127
CHP
Performs the channel power
measurement
N/A
N/A
N/A
CHPGR
Channel power graph on or off
N/A
N/A
N/A
CHPWRBW
Channel power bandwidth
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 128
CLRAVG
Reset avg. counter to 1
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 129
CLRBOX
Clears a rectangular area on the
analyzer display
N/A
N/A
N/A
CLRDSP
Clear display
N/A
N/A
No
CLRSCHED
Clears autosave & autoexec
schedule buffer
N/A
N/A
No
CLRW
Clear-writes specified trace
Yes
Yes
Yes
CLS
Clear status byte
N/A
N/A
N/A
CMDERRQ
Command error query
N/A
N/A
N/A
CNF
Confidence test
N/A
N/A
N/A
CNTLA
Auxiliary interface control line
A
N/A
N/A
No
CNTLB
Auxiliary interface control line
B
N/A
N/A
No
CNTLC
Auxiliary interface control line
C
N/A
N/A
No
CNTLD
Auxiliary interface control line
D
N/A
N/A
No
CNTLI
Auxiliary interface control line
input
N/A
N/A
No
CNVLOSS
Selects ref level offset to
calibrate amplitude display
No
N/A
No
COMB
Turns the comb generator on or
off
N/A
N/A
N/A
COMPRESS
Compress
No
No
N/A
CONCAT
Concat
No
No
N/A
CONTS
Continuous sweep mode
Yes
Yes
Yes
46
Page 130
Page 132
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their N9061A Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
Page for
Further
Details
CORREK
Correction factors on
N/A
N/A
N/A
COUPLE
Selects AC or DC coupling
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 133
CR
Couples Resolution BW
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 134
CRTHPOS
Horizontal position of CRT
display
N/A
N/A
N/A
CRTVPOS
Vertical position of CRT
display
N/A
N/A
N/A
CS
Couples Step Size
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 135
CT
Couples Sweep Time
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 136
CTA
Converts display units to dBm
No
No
N/A
CTM
Converts dBm to display units
No
No
N/A
CTRLHPIB
Allows SA to control HP-IB
N/A
N/A
No
CV
Couples Video Bandwidth
Yes
Yes
Yes
D1
Sets display to normal size
No
No
N/A
D2
Sets display to full CRT size
No
No
N/A
D3
Sets display to expanded size
No
No
N/A
DA
Display Memory Address
Yes
Yes
N/A
DATEMODE
Set the date display format
N/A
N/A
No
DD
Display write binary
No
No
N/A
DELMKBW
Occupied power bandwidth
within delta marker
N/A
N/A
Yes
DEMOD
Turns the demodulator on or off
N/A
N/A
No
DEMODAGC
Demodulation automatic gain
control
N/A
N/A
No
DEMODT
Demodulation time
N/A
N/A
No
DET
Detection Mode
Yes
Yes
Yes
DISPOSE
Frees Memory
No
No
No
DIV
Divide
No
No
No
DL
Display Line Level
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 141
DLE
Turns the display line on/off
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 143
Page 137
Page 138
Page 139
Page 140
47
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their N9061A Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
Page for
Further
Details
DLYSWP
Delay sweep
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 144
DN
Reduces the active function by
applicable step size
N/A
N/A
N/A
DONE
Synchronizing function
Yes
Yes
Yes
DOTDENS
Sets the dot density value in
Analog+ display mode
N/A
N/A
N/A
DR
Display Memory Address Read
Yes
Yes
N/A
DRAWBOX
Draws a rectangular box on
analyzer display
N/A
N/A
N/A
DSPLY
Display
No
No
No
DT
Define Terminator
No
No
N/A
DW
Display Memory Address Write
No
No
N/A
E1
Active marker to maximum
signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 147
E2
Active marker to center
frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 148
E3
Active marker frequency to CF
step size
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 149
E4
Active marker to reference level
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 150
EDITDONE
Indicates limit line editing is
complete
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 151
EDITLIML
Allows current limit line to be
edited
N/A
N/A
No
EE
Enable entry
No
No
N/A
EK
Enable knob
No
No
N/A
ELSE
Conditional Programming
(If…then…else…endif)
No
No
No
EM
Erase trace C memory
No
No
No
ENDIF
Conditional Programming
(If…then…else…endif)
No
No
N/A
ENTER
Enter from HP-IB
No
No
No
EP
Enter parameter function
N/A
N/A
N/A
48
Page 145
Page 146
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their N9061A Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
Page for
Further
Details
ERASE
User memory & registers erased
No
No
N/A
ERR
Queries the error queue
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 152
ET
Elapsed time
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 154
EX
Exchanges trace A & B
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 155
EXP
Exponential
No
No
No
EXTMXR
Presets external mixing mode
No
N/A
No
FA
Start frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 156
FB
Stop frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 157
FDIAG
Frequency diagnostics
N/A
N/A
No
FDSP
Frequency display off
N/A
N/A
Yes
FFT
Fast fourier transform
No
No
No
FFTAUTO
Marker to Auto FFT
N/A
N/A
N/A
FFTCLIP
FFT signal clipped
N/A
N/A
N/A
FFTCONTS
FFT continuous sweep
N/A
N/A
N/A
FFTKNL
Fast fourier transform kernel
No
No
N/A
FFTMKR
FFT markers
N/A
N/A
N/A
FFTMM
FFT marker to midscreen
N/A
N/A
N/A
FFTMS
FFT marker to FFT stop
frequency
N/A
N/A
N/A
FFTOFF
FFT off
N/A
N/A
N/A
FFTPCTAM
FFT percent amplitude
modulation
N/A
N/A
N/A
FFTPCTAMR
FFT percent amplitude
modulation readout
N/A
N/A
N/A
FFTSNGLS
FFT single sweep
N/A
N/A
N/A
FFTSTAT
FFT status
N/A
N/A
N/A
FFTSTOP
FFT stop frequency
N/A
N/A
N/A
FMGAIN
FM gain
N/A
N/A
N/A
FOFFSET
Frequency offset
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 158
Page 159
49
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their N9061A Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
FORMAT
Erase & format the selected
memory device
N/A
N/A
No
FPKA
Fast preselector peak
Yes
N/A
N/A
Page 161
FREF
Frequency reference
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 162
FS
Full frequency span
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 163
FULBAND
Set start/stop freq for ext mixing
bands
No
N/A
No
FUNCDEF
Function definition
No
No
No
GATE
Turn time-gating on or off
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 166
GATECTL
Gate control
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 167
GC
Gate preset
N/A
N/A
N/A
GD
Gate delay
N/A
N/A
Yes
GDRVCLPAR
Clear pulse parameters
N/A
N/A
N/A
GDRVGDEL
Gate Delay for the frequency
window
N/A
N/A
N/A
GDRVGLEN
Gate length for frequency &
time windows
N/A
N/A
N/A
GDRVGT
Turns gate in frequency window
on or off
N/A
N/A
N/A
GDRVGTIM
Gate trigger to marker position
for time window
N/A
N/A
N/A
GDRVPRI
Pulse repetition interval
N/A
N/A
N/A
GDRVPWID
Pulse width
N/A
N/A
N/A
GDRVRBW
Couple resolution bandwidth to
pulse width
N/A
N/A
N/A
GDRVREFE
Enter reference edge
N/A
N/A
N/A
GDRVST
Couple sweep time to pulse
repetition interval
N/A
N/A
N/A
GDRVSWAP
Update the time or frequency
window
N/A
N/A
N/A
GDRVSWDE
Delay sweep for time window
N/A
N/A
N/A
50
Page for
Further
Details
Page 168
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their N9061A Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
Page for
Further
Details
GDRVSWP
Sweep time for the time
window
N/A
N/A
N/A
GDRVUTIL
Turns the gate utility on or off
N/A
N/A
N/A
GDRVVBW
Couple video bandwidth to the
gate length
N/A
N/A
N/A
GETPLOT
Get plot
N/A
N/A
N/A
GETPRNT
Get print
N/A
N/A
N/A
GL
Gate length
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 169
GP
Sets the polarity
(positive/negative) of the gate
trigger
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 170
GR
Plot GPIB input as Graphs
No
No
N/A
GRAT
Graticule on/off
Yes
Yes
Yes
HAVE
Checks for options installed
N/A
N/A
N/A
HD
Holds data entry
No
No
No
HN
Harmonic number
N/A
N/A
N/A
HNLOCK
Harmonic lock
No
N/A
No
HNUNLK
Harmonic band unlock
No
N/A
No
I1
Sets the RF coupling to AC
N/A
Yes
N/A
Page 173
I2
Sets the RF coupling to DC
N/A
Yes
N/A
Page 175
IB
Input to trace B memory
No
No
N/A
ID
Instrument identification
Yes
Yes
Yes
IDCF
Identified signal to center
frequency
N/A
N/A
No
IDFREQ
Identified signal frequency
N/A
N/A
No
IDSTAT
Signal identifier status
No
N/A
N/A
IF
Conditional Programming
(If…then…else…endif)
No
No
No
IFTKNL
16 bit discrete fourier transform
No
No
N/A
INT
Integer
No
No
No
INZ
Input impedance
N/A
N/A
N/A
Page 171
Page 172
Page 177
51
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their N9061A Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
Page for
Further
Details
IP
Instrument preset
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 178
KEYCLR
Clear user defined keys
N/A
N/A
No
KEYCMD
Define function & label of
softkey
N/A
N/A
N/A
KEYDEF
Assign function to soft key
No
No
No
KEYENH
Key enhance
N/A
N/A
N/A
KEYEXC
Executes specified soft key
No
No
N/A
KEYLBL
Relabels softkey without
changing its function
N/A
N/A
N/A
KS,
Mixer level
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 179
KS=
HP8566: Selects factory
preselector setting
HP8568: Marker counter
frequency resolution
Yes
Yes
No
Page 180
KS(
Locks the save registers
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 181
KS)
Unlocks the save registers
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 182
KS>
Specifies preamp gain for signal
input 2
N/A
No
N/A
KS<
Specifies preamp gain for signal
input 1
N/A
No
N/A
KS|
Display memory address write
No
No
N/A
KS#
Turns off YTX self-heating
correction
No
N/A
N/A
KS/
Allows preselector to be peaked
manually
No
N/A
N/A
KS123
Returns up to 1001 words
display memory
No
No
N/A
KS125
Writes up to 1001 display
memory words
No
No
N/A
KS126
Returns every Nth value of a
trace
No
No
N/A
KS127
Sets analyzer to accept binary
display write
No
No
N/A
52
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their N9061A Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
Page for
Further
Details
KS39
Writes display memory address
in fast binary
No
No
N/A
KS43
Sets SRQ 102 when frequency
limit exceeded
No
No
N/A
KS91
Returns the amplitude error
No
No
N/A
KS92
Specifies value DL, TH, active
mkr in display units
No
No
N/A
KS94
Returns code for harmonic
number in binary
No
No
N/A
KSA
Sets amplitude units to dBm
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 183
KSa
Selects normal detection
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 184
KSB
Sets amplitude units to dBmV
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 185
KSb
Selects positive peak detection
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 186
KSC
Sets amplitude units to dBuV
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 187
KSc
Trace A + trace B -> trace A
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 188
KSD
Sets amplitude units to V
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 189
KSd
Selects negative peak detection
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 190
KSE
Sets the analyzer title mode
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 191
KSe
Selects sample detection
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 192
KSF
HP8566: Shifts the YTO
HP8568: Measures the Sweep
Time
No
No
N/A
KSf
Recover last instrument state at
power on
No
No
N/A
KSG
Turns on video averaging
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 193
KSg
Turns off the display
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 194
KSH
Turns off video averaging
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 195
KSh
Turns on the display
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 196
KSI
Allows the reference level to be
extended
No
No
N/A
KSi
Exchanges traces B & C
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 197
53
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their N9061A Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
KSJ
Manual control of DACs
No
No
N/A
KSj
Views trace C
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 198
KSK
HP8566: Active Mkr to next
highest peak
HP8568: Counts pilot IF at
marker
Yes
No
N/A
Page 199
KSk
Blanks trace C
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 200
KSL
Turns off marker noise function
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 201
KSl
Moves trace B into trace C
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 202
KSM
Turns on marker noise function
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 203
KSm
Turns off the graticule
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 204
KSN
Marker minimum value
detected
Yes
No
N/A
Page 205
KSn
Turns on the graticule
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 206
KSO
Marker span
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 207
KSo
Turns off the annotation
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 208
KSP
GPIB address
No
No
N/A
KSp
Turns on the annotation
Yes
Yes
N/A
KSQ
Unlocks frequency band
No
No
N/A
KSq
Decouples IF gain and input
attenuation
No
No
N/A
KSR
Turns on service diagnostics
No
No
N/A
KSr
Sets service request 102
No
No
N/A
KSS
HP8566: Fast GPIB operation
HP8568: Determine second LO
frequency
No
No
N/A
KST
HP8566: Fast preset
HP8568: Shifts second LO
down
Yes
No
N/A
KSt
HP8566: Locks frequency band
HP8568: Continues sweep from
marker
No
No
N/A
54
Page for
Further
Details
Page 209
Page 210
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their N9061A Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
Page for
Further
Details
KSU
HP8566: External mixer preset
HP8568: Shift second LO up
No
No
N/A
KSu
Stops the sweep at the active
marker
No
No
N/A
KSV
Frequency offset
Yes
Yes
N/A
KSv
HP8566: External mixer
frequency identifier
HP8568: Inhibits phase lock
No
No
N/A
KSW
Amplitude error correction
routine
No
No
N/A
KSw
Displays amplitude error
correction routine
No
No
N/A
KSX
Amplitude correction factors on
No
No
N/A
KSx
Sets trigger mode to external
Yes
Yes
N/A
KSY
Amplitude correction factors off
No
No
N/A
KSy
Sets trigger mode to video
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 213
KSZ
Reference level offset
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 214
KSz
Sets the display storage address
No
No
N/A
L0
Turns off the display line
Yes
Yes
Yes
LB
Writes text label
No
No
No
LCLVAR
Defines a local variable for use
N/A
N/A
No
LF
Preset 0−2.5GHz
Yes
N/A
N/A
Page 216
LG
Selects log scale
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 217
LIMD
Delta amplitude value for limit
line segment
N/A
N/A
Yes
LIMF
Frequency value for limit-line
segment
N/A
N/A
Yes
LIMIDEL
Erase contents of limit line table
N/A
N/A
N/A
LIMIDISP
Controls when the limit line(s)
are displayed
N/A
N/A
N/A
LIMIFAIL
Limit line fail
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 211
Page 212
Page 215
Page 219
Page 220
55
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their N9061A Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
LIMIFT
Select frequency or time limit
line
N/A
N/A
N/A
LIMIHI
Upper limit
N/A
N/A
N/A
LIMILINE
Limit line
N/A
N/A
N/A
LIMILO
Lower limit
N/A
N/A
N/A
LIMIMIRROR
Mirror limit line
N/A
N/A
N/A
LIMIMODE
Limit line entry mode
N/A
N/A
N/A
LIMIPURGE
Disposes of current limit line,
not limit line table
N/A
N/A
Yes
LIMIRCL
Load stored limit line into limit
line table
N/A
N/A
No
LIMIREL
Determine whether limit line
values absolute/relative
N/A
N/A
Yes
LIMISAV
Save contents of limit line table
for recall
N/A
N/A
No
LIMISEG
Define slope & offset of limit
line segments
N/A
N/A
N/A
LIMISEGT
Enter limit line segment for
sweep time
N/A
N/A
N/A
LIMITEST
Compare active trace data to
limit line parameters
N/A
N/A
Yes
LIML
Amplitude value for limit line
segment in lower limit line
N/A
N/A
Yes
LIMM
Middle amplitude value for
limit-line segment
N/A
N/A
Yes
LIMTFL
Specifies a flat limit-line
segment
N/A
N/A
No
LIMTSL
Specifies a sloped limit-line
segment
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 224
LIMU
Amplitude value for limit line
segment in upper limit line
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 225
LINFILL
Line fill
N/A
N/A
N/A
LL
Provides lower left recorder
output voltage at rear
No
No
N/A
56
Page for
Further
Details
Page 221
Page 222
Page 223
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their N9061A Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
Page for
Further
Details
LN
Selects linear scale
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 226
LOAD
Load article/file into internal
memory
N/A
N/A
N/A
LOG
Log
No
No
No
LOLIMOFF
LO Limit Off
No
No
N/A
LSPAN
Last span
N/A
N/A
N/A
M1
Turns off all markers
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 227
M2
Marker Normal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 228
M3
Marker Delta
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 229
M4
Marker zoom
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 230
MA
Returns the amplitude of active
marker
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 231
MBIAS
Mixer bias
N/A
N/A
No
MBRD
Processor memory block read
No
No
N/A
MBWR
Processor memory block write
No
No
N/A
MC0
Turns off the marker frequency
counter
N/A
Yes
N/A
Page 232
MC1
Turns on the marker frequency
counter
N/A
Yes
N/A
Page 233
MDS
Measurement data size
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 234
MDU
Measurement data units
No
No
N/A
MEAN
Returns mean value of trace in
display units
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 235
MEANPWR
Mean power measurement
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 236
MEANTH
Trace mean above threshold
N/A
N/A
N/A
MEAS
Measurement status
N/A
N/A
No
MEASOFF
Measurement off
N/A
N/A
N/A
MEASURE
Measure mode
N/A
N/A
N/A
MEM
Returns amount of memory
available
No
No
No
MENU
Menu
N/A
N/A
No
57
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their N9061A Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
MERGE
Merge two traces
No
No
N/A
MF
Returns frequency of the active
marker
Yes
Yes
Yes
MIN
Minimum
No
No
No
MINH
Min Hold
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 239
MINPOS
Returns the minimum position
in the trace
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 240
MIRROR
Mirror image of the trace
No
No
N/A
MKA
Amplitude of the active marker
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 241
MKACT
Specifies the active marker
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 242
MKACTV
Marker as the active function
N/A
N/A
N/A
MKBW
Marker bandwidth
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 243
MKCF
Moves the active marker to
center frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 244
MKCHEDGE
Marker to channel edge
N/A
N/A
No
MKCONT
Continues sweeping from the
marker after stop
No
No
N/A
MKD
Delta marker
Yes
Yes
Yes
MKDELCHBW
Delta markers to channel power
bandwidth
N/A
N/A
No
MKDLMODE
Marker delta display line mode
N/A
N/A
N/A
MKDR
Reciprocal of marker delta
N/A
N/A
No
MKF
Specifies the frequency of the
active marker
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 246
MKFC
Turns the marker frequency
counter on or off
N/A
Yes
Yes
Page 247
MKFCR
Specifies the marker frequency
counter resolution
N/A
Yes
Yes
Page 248
MKMCF
Marker mean to center
frequency
N/A
N/A
No
MKMIN
Moves active marker to
minimum signal detected
Yes
Yes
Yes
58
Page for
Further
Details
Page 238
Page 245
Page 250
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their N9061A Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
Page for
Further
Details
MKN
Normal marker
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 251
MKNOISE
Marker noise function
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 252
MKOFF
Turns all markers or the active
marker off
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 253
MKP
Specifies the horizontal position
of the marker
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 254
MKPAUSE
Pauses the sweep at the active
marker
No
No
N/A
MKPK
Marker peak
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 255
MKPT
Marker peak threshold
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 256
MKPX
Marker peak excursion
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 257
MKREAD
Specifies marker readout mode
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 258
MKRL
Moves the active marker to
reference level
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 260
MKSP
Marker span
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 261
MKSS
Marker step size
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 262
MKSTOP
Stops the sweep at the active
marker
No
No
N/A
MKT
Position marker in units of time
N/A
N/A
Yes
MKTBL
Marker table
N/A
N/A
N/A
MKTRACE
Marker trace
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 264
MKTRACK
Turns the marker signal track on
or off
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 265
MKTYPE
Specifies the type of active
marker to be used
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 266
ML
Mixer Level
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 267
MOD
Modulo
No
No
No
MODE
Mode of operation
N/A
N/A
N/A
MODRCLT
Recalls trace from module
memory
N/A
N/A
No
MODSAVT
Saves trace in module memory
N/A
N/A
No
Page 263
59
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their N9061A Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
MOV
Move
No
No
No
MPY
Multiply
No
No
No
MRD
Memory Read
No
No
N/A
MRDB
Memory read byte
No
No
N/A
MSDEV
Specifies mass storage device
N/A
N/A
No
MSI
Mass storage interface
N/A
N/A
N/A
MT0
Turns off marker signal track
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 269
MT1
Turns on marker signal track
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 270
MWR
Memory Write
No
No
N/A
MWRB
Memory write byte
No
No
N/A
MXM
Maximum
No
No
No
MXMH
Max Hold
Yes
Yes
Yes
MXRMODE
Mixer mode
N/A
N/A
No
NDB
Number of dB
N/A
N/A
N/A
NDBPNT
Turns the N dB points function
on or off
N/A
N/A
N/A
NDBPNTR
N dB points bandwidth
N/A
N/A
N/A
NORMLIZE
Normalize trace data
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 272
NRL
Normalized reference level
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 273
NRPOS
Normalized reference position
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 274
NSTART
Start harmonic
No
N/A
N/A
NSTOP
Stop harmonic
No
N/A
N/A
O1
Output format
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 275
O2
Output format
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 276
O3
Output format
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 277
O4
Output format
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 278
OA
Returns the active function
value
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 279
OBW
Occupied bandwidth
N/A
N/A
N/A
60
Page for
Further
Details
Page 271
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their N9061A Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
Page for
Further
Details
OBWBW
Bandwidth measured by
occupied bandwidth
N/A
N/A
N/A
OBWFERR
Occupied bandwidth transmit
frequency error
N/A
N/A
N/A
OBWLOWER
Relative lower frequency limit
of occupied bandwidth
N/A
N/A
N/A
OBWPCT
Occupied bandwidth percent
N/A
N/A
N/A
OBWPWR
Total power in the occupied
bandwidth
N/A
N/A
N/A
OBWUPPER
Relative upper frequency limit
of occupied bandwidth
N/A
N/A
N/A
OCCUP
Percent occupied power
bandwidth
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 280
OL
Output learn string
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 281
ONCYCLE
On cycle
N/A
N/A
N/A
ONDELAY
On delay
N/A
N/A
N/A
ONEOS
On end of sweep
No
No
No
ONMKR
On marker pause
N/A
N/A
N/A
ONMKRU
On marker update
N/A
N/A
N/A
ONPWRUP
On power up
N/A
N/A
N/A
ONSRQ
On service request
N/A
N/A
N/A
ONSWP
On sweep
No
No
N/A
ONTIME
On time
N/A
N/A
N/A
OP
Output parameters
No
No
No
OR
Set position of origin
N/A
N/A
No
OT
Output trace annotations
Yes
Yes
N/A
OUTPUT
Output - sending data to the
GPIB from function
No
No
No
PA
Plot absolute
No
No
No
PARSTAT
Parallel status
N/A
N/A
N/A
Page 284
61
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their N9061A Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
PCTAM
Turns the percent AM
measurement on or off
N/A
N/A
N/A
PCTAMR
Percent AM response
N/A
N/A
N/A
PD
Pen down
No
No
No
PDA
Probability distribution
amplitude
No
No
No
PDF
Probability distribution
frequency
No
No
No
PEAKS
Sorts the signal peaks by
amplitude/frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
PKDLMODE
Peak table delta display line
mode
N/A
N/A
N/A
PKPOS
Peak position
Yes
Yes
N/A
PKRES
Peak result
N/A
N/A
N/A
PKSORT
Selects how to sort signal peaks
listed in peak table
N/A
N/A
N/A
PKTBL
Turns the peak table on or off
N/A
N/A
N/A
PKZMOK
Peak zoom okay
N/A
N/A
N/A
PKZOOM
Peak zoom
N/A
N/A
N/A
PLOT
Prints the screen
Yes
Yes
Yes
PLOTORG
Display origins
N/A
N/A
No
PLOTSRC
Plot source
N/A
N/A
No
PLTPRT
Plot port
N/A
N/A
N/A
POWERON
Power on state
N/A
N/A
N/A
PP
Peaks the preselector
Yes
N/A
Yes
PR
Plot relative
No
No
No
PREAMPG
External preamplifier gain
N/A
N/A
N/A
PREFX
Change user memory entries
file prefix
N/A
N/A
N/A
PRINT
Print
N/A
N/A
Yes
PRNPRT
Print port
N/A
N/A
N/A
62
Page for
Further
Details
Page 285
Page 286
Page 287
Page 288
Page 289
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their N9061A Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
Page for
Further
Details
PRNTADRS
Print address
N/A
N/A
N/A
PS
Skip page
No
No
N/A
PSDAC
Preselector DAC number
N/A
N/A
No
PSTATE
Protect state
N/A
N/A
No
PU
Pen up
No
No
No
PURGE
Purge file
N/A
N/A
N/A
PWRBW
Power bandwidth
Yes
Yes
Yes
PWRUPTIME
Power up time
N/A
N/A
N/A
Q0
Sets detector to EMI Peak
detection
No
No
N/A
Q1
Sets detector to Quasi Peak
detection
No
No
N/A
R1
Resets service request 140
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 291
R2
Allows service request 140 &
104
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 292
R3
Allows service request 140 &
110
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 293
R4
Allows service request 140 &
102
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 294
RB
Resolution bandwidth
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 295
RBR
Resolution bandwidth/Span
ratio
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 297
RC
Recalls state register
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 298
RCLOSCAL
Recall open/short average
N/A
N/A
No
RCLS
Recall state
Yes
Yes
Yes
RCLT
Recall trace
N/A
N/A
No
RCLTHRU
Recall internal thru-reference
trace into trace B
N/A
N/A
No
RELHPIB
Release control of GPIB
N/A
N/A
No
REPEAT
Conditional Programming
(Repeat .. Until …)
No
No
No
Page 290
Page 299
63
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their N9061A Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
RESETRL
Reset reference level
N/A
N/A
N/A
RETURN
Return to user defined function
origination point
N/A
N/A
No
REV
Returns the revision string to
the controller
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 300
RL
Reference level
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 301
RLCAL
Reference level calibration
N/A
N/A
No
RLPOS
Reference level position
N/A
N/A
N/A
RMS
Root mean square
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 303
ROFFSET
Reference level offset
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 304
RQS
SRQ mask
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 305
S1
Continuous sweep mode
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 306
S2
Single sweep mode
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 307
SADD
Adds a limit line segment
N/A
N/A
No
SAVEMENU
Save menu
N/A
N/A
N/A
SAVES
Saves analyzer state to specified
register
Yes
Yes
Yes
SAVET
Save trace
N/A
N/A
No
SAVRCLF
Save or recall flag
N/A
N/A
N/A
SAVRCLN
Save or recall number
N/A
N/A
N/A
SAVRCLW
Save or recall data
N/A
N/A
N/A
SDEL
Deletes a limit line segment
N/A
N/A
No
SDON
Indicates limit line segment is
done
N/A
N/A
No
SEDI
Edits limit line segment
N/A
N/A
No
SEGDEL
Delete specified segment from
limit line tables
N/A
N/A
N/A
SENTER
Segment entry for frequency
limit lines
N/A
N/A
No
SENTERT
Segment entry for sweep time
limit lines
N/A
N/A
N/A
64
Page for
Further
Details
Page 308
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their N9061A Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
Page for
Further
Details
SER
Serial number
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 309
SETDATE
Set the date of spectrum
analyzer
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 310
SETTIME
Set the time of spectrum
analyzer
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 311
SHOWMENU
Shows menu
N/A
N/A
No
SIGDEL
Signal amplitude delta
No
N/A
N/A
SIGID
External mixing frequency
bands signal identifier
No
N/A
No
SKYCLR
Clears user softkey
N/A
N/A
No
SKYDEF
Defines user softkey
N/A
N/A
No
SMOOTH
Smooths given trace over
specified number points
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 312
SNGLS
Single sweep mode
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 313
SP
Frequency Span
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 314
SPEAKER
Turns the internal speaker on or
off
N/A
N/A
N/A
SPZOOM
Span Zoom
N/A
N/A
N/A
SQLCH
Sets the squelch threshold
N/A
N/A
N/A
SQR
Square root
No
No
No
SQUELCH
Adjusts squelch level
N/A
N/A
No
SRCALC
Selects internal or external level
control
N/A
N/A
No
SRCAT
Attenuate source output level
N/A
N/A
N/A
SRCCRSTK
Coarse tracking adjust
N/A
N/A
No
SRCFINTK
Fine tracking adjust
N/A
N/A
No
SRCNORM
Source normalization
N/A
N/A
N/A
SRCPOFS
Offset source power level
N/A
N/A
No
SRCPSTP
Select source power step size
N/A
N/A
No
SRCPSWP
Select sweep range of source
output
N/A
N/A
No
65
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their N9061A Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
SRCPWR
Select source power level
N/A
N/A
No
SRCTK
Adjust tracking of source output
with SA sweep
N/A
N/A
N/A
SRCTKPK
Auto adjust tracking of source
output with SA sweep
N/A
N/A
No
SRQ
Service request
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 316
SS
Frequency Step Size
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 317
ST
Sweep Time
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 318
STB
Status byte query
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 320
STDEV
Standard deviation of trace
amplitude
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 321
STOR
Store file
N/A
N/A
N/A
STOREOPEN
Save current instrument state
N/A
N/A
No
STORESHORT
Store short
N/A
N/A
No
STORETHRU
Store thru-calibration trace in
trace B
N/A
N/A
No
SUB
Subtract
No
No
No
SUM
Sum of trace element
amplitudes in display units
No
No
Yes
SUMSQR
Squares trace element
amplitudes & returns sum
No
No
No
SV
Saves state
Yes
Yes
Yes
SW
Skip to next control instruction
No
No
N/A
SWPCPL
Sweep couple
N/A
N/A
Yes
SWPOUT
Sweep output
N/A
N/A
No
SYNCMODE
Synchronize mode
N/A
N/A
N/A
T0
Turns the threshold level off
No
No
N/A
T1
Sets the trigger mode to free run
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 326
T2
Sets the trigger mode to line
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 327
T3
Sets the trigger mode to external
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 328
T4
Sets the trigger mode to video
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 329
66
Page for
Further
Details
Page 322
Page 324
Page 325
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their N9061A Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
Page for
Further
Details
T7
Sets the trigger mode to level
No
No
N/A
T8
Sets the trigger mode to edge
No
No
N/A
TA
Returns trace A amplitude
values to controller
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 330
TB
Returns trace B amplitude
values to controller
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 331
TDF
Trace data format
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 332
TEXT
Writes text on the analyzer
screen
No
No
No
TH
Threshold
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 333
THE
Turns the threshold on or off
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 334
THEN
Conditional Programming
(If…then…else…endif)
No
No
No
TIMEDATE
Allows setting of time & date
for analyzer
N/A
N/A
Yes
TIMEDSP
Enables display of time & data
on analyzer display
N/A
N/A
N/A
TITLE
Title entry
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 336
TM
Trigger Mode
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 337
TOI
Third order intermodulation
measurement
N/A
N/A
N/A
TOIR
Third order intermodulation
response
N/A
N/A
N/A
TRA
Returns trace A amplitude
values to controller
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 338
TRB
Returns trace B amplitude
values to controller
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 339
TRC
Returns trace C amplitude
values to controller
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 340
TRCMEM
Trace C memory
N/A
N/A
N/A
TRDEF
Trace define
No
No
No
TRDSP
Trace display
Yes
Yes
N/A
TRGRPH
Trace graph display
No
No
N/A
Page 335
Page 341
67
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their N9061A Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
Page for
Further
Details
TRIGPOL
Trigger polarity
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 342
TRMATH
Executes specified trace math at
end of sweep
No
No
N/A
TRPRST
Sets trace operations to their
preset values
No
No
N/A
TRSTAT
Returns current trace states to
controller
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 343
TS
Takes a sweep
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 344
TVLINE
Selects which horizontal line of
video to trigger on
N/A
N/A
N/A
TVLSFRM
Selects the type of video frame
to trigger on
N/A
N/A
N/A
TVSTND
TV standard
N/A
N/A
N/A
TVSYNC
Selects polarity of video
modulation to trigger on
N/A
N/A
N/A
TWNDOW
Formats trace information for
FFT.
N/A
N/A
No
UNTIL
Conditional Programming
(Repeat…Until…)
No
No
No
UP
Increases active function value
by applicable step
N/A
N/A
N/A
UR
Upper right x-y recorder output
voltage at rear
No
No
N/A
USTATE
Configures user defined states
No
No
N/A
VARDEF
Variable definition
No
No
No
VARIANCE
Returns the amplitude variance
of specified trace
No
No
No
VAVG
Turns video averaging on or off
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 345
VB
Video Bandwidth
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 347
VBO
Video Bandwidth Coupling
Offset
Yes
Yes
N/A
Page 349
VBR
Video Bandwidth Ratio
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 350
68
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
Table 2-1
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their N9061A Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
Page for
Further
Details
VIEW
Stores and views the specified
trace
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 351
VTL
Video trigger level
N/A
N/A
Yes
Page 353
WAIT
Suspend program operation for
specified time
N/A
N/A
N/A
WINNEXT
Next window
N/A
N/A
N/A
WINOFF
Turns off the window display
mode
N/A
N/A
N/A
WINON
Turns on the window display
mode
N/A
N/A
N/A
WINZOOM
Window zoom
N/A
N/A
N/A
XCH
Exchanges the two specified
traces.
Yes
Yes
N/A
ZMKCNTR
Zone marker at center
frequency
N/A
N/A
N/A
ZMKPKNL
Zone marker for next peak left
N/A
N/A
N/A
ZMKPKNR
Zone marker for next peak right
N/A
N/A
N/A
ZMKSPAN
Zone marker span
N/A
N/A
N/A
Page 354
69
Legacy Analyzer Command List
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands
70
3
Hints and Tips
This chapter includes a list of helpful hints and tips that will help you get the most from the N9061A
application on your X-Series analyzer.
71
Hints and Tips
Hints and Tips
Hints and Tips
These pages lists a few hints and tips that will help you get the most from your analyzer and the N9061A
application.
•
Compatibility - speed and consistency - for best compatibility with your legacy analyzer, the
N9061A application should be used on the analyzer whose frequency range most closely matches the
frequency range of your legacy analyzer. For example, the best match for the 8563E with its 26.5
GHz upper frequency limit is X-Series analyzer which also has an upper frequency limit of 26.5
GHz.
•
Compatibility and Sweep Times - for best compatibility between X-Series analyzers and the legacy
analyzers, use the Manual Swept mode for 8566A/B, 8568A/B Series analyzers. Manual Swept mode
is the default setting on X-Series analyzers with N9061A installed.
When analyzing stationary signals, you can change to the Best Speed setting, which is accessed from
the Mode Setup > Preferences > Swp Type Rule menu. This results in faster sweep times on a
X-Series analyzer than on the legacy analyzers because of the X-Series analyzer’s better
performance. In the majority of applications, this faster speed would be desirable, but that is not
always the case.
•
Time-out - Agilent recommends increasing the timeout on a serial poll (SPOLL) due to differences in
Sweep Times on some settings. Note, however, that this may not be necessary when using the Best
Speed setting on the Preferences > Swp Type Rule menu (accessed from the Mode Setup hardkey).
•
Synchronization (1) - to synchronize after an IP command, Agilent recommends that you use the
DONE command. We also suggest that the DONE command is used in conjunction with a timeout of
about 5 seconds in case the analyzer starts to auto align. Alternatively, you could set auto alignment
to Off. To set auto alignment to Off, press System, Alignments, Auto Align on the front panel.
•
Synchronization (2) - Agilent recommends that synchronization (using the DONE command) is
used with marker functions when signal tracking is turned on.
•
Changing Modes - After changing into or out of RLC mode, allow at least a 1 second delay before
sending subsequent commands.
•
AC and DC Coupling - The 8560 Series of legacy analyzers have one RF input port, and support AC
and DC coupling through the COUPLE command (page 133).
The 8568A/B has two RF input ports:
— DC Coupled (with a BNC connector) to handle a frequency range of 100 Hz to 1.5 GHz
— AC Coupled (with an N Type connector) to handle a frequency range of 100 kHz to 1.5 GHz
WARNING
If the input signal to the X-series analyzer has a DC component, ensure that
when you select a legacy instrument with a possible coupling change to DC,
the input signal does not exceed the input specifications of the X-series
analyzer.
The X-series analyzers also have one RF input port. When using the X-Series analyzers, you must use
DC coupling to see calibrated frequencies of less than 20 MHz. Signals of less than 20 MHz are not
72
Hints and Tips
Hints and Tips
calibrated when using AC coupling on these analyzers.
73
Hints and Tips
Hints and Tips
74
4
Programming Commands
This chapter lists all the supported 8560 Series, 8566A/B and 8568A/B compatible commands in
alphanumeric order, and gives brief details on their syntax and operation. For more detailed information
on these commands, see your 8566A/B, 8568A/B, 8560 Series User’s Guide.
75
Programming Commands
Command Syntax
Command Syntax
Command syntax is represented pictorially.
•
Ovals enclose command mnemonics. The command mnemonic must be entered as shown with the
exception that the case can be upper or lower.
•
Circles and ovals surround secondary keywords or special numbers and characters. The characters in
circles and ovals are considered reserved words and must be entered as shown with the exception that
the case can be upper or lower.
•
Rectangles contain the description of a syntax element defined in Table 4-1, “Syntax Elements.”
•
A loop above a syntax element indicates that the syntax element can be repeated.
•
Solid lines represent the recommended path.
•
Dotted lines indicate an optional path for bypassing secondary keywords or using alternate units.
•
Arrows and curved intersections indicate command path direction.
•
Semicolons are the recommended command terminators. Using semicolons makes programs easier to
read, prevents command misinterpretation, and is recommended by IEEE Standard 728.
NOTE
Uppercase is recommended for entering all commands unless otherwise noted.
Syntax Elements are shown in the syntax diagrams as elements within rectangles. In the syntax
diagrams, characters and secondary keywords are shown within circles or ovals.
Table 4-1
Syntax Component
Syntax Elements
Definition/Range
Analyzer command
Any analyzer command in this chapter, with required parameters and terminators.
Character
SP a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z databyte.
Character & EOI
8-bit byte containing only character data and followed by end-or-identify (EOI)
condition, where the EOI control line on GPIB is asserted to indicate the end of the
transmission. END signifies the EOI condition.
76
Programming Commands
Command Syntax
Table 4-1
Syntax Elements
Syntax Component
Definition/Range
Character string
A list of characters.
Data byte
8-bit byte containing numeric or character data.
Data byte & EOI
8-bit byte containing numeric or character data followed by end-or-identify (EOI)
condition, where the EOI control line on GPIB is asserted to indicate the end of the
transmission. END signifies the EOI condition.
Delimiter
| \ @ ˆ $ % ; ! Matching characters that mark the beginning and end of a character
string, or a list of analyzer commands. Choose delimiting characters that are not used
within the string they delimit.
Digit
0123456789
lsb length
Represents the least significant byte of a two-byte word that describes the number of
bytes returned or transmitted. See msb length.
msb length
Represents the most significant byte of a two-byte word that describes the number of
bytes returned or transmitted. See lsb length.
Number
Expressed as integer, decimal, or in exponential (E) form.
Real Number Range: ± 1.797693134862315 × 10308, including 0.
Up to 15 significant figures allowed.
Numbers may be as small as ± 2.225073858507202 × 10−308
Integer Number Range: −32,768 through +32,767
Output termination
Line feed (LF) and end-or-identify (EOI) condition. ASCII code 10 (line feed) is sent
via GPIB and the end-or-identify control line on GPIB sets to indicate the end of the
transmission.
Units
Represent standard scientific units.
Frequency Units: GZ, GHZ, MZ, MHZ, KZ, KHZ, HZ
Amplitude Units: DB, DBMV, DM, DBM, DBUV, V, MV, UV, W, MW, UW
Time Units: SC, S, MS, US
77
Programming Commands
Programming Command Descriptions
Programming Command Descriptions
All supported commands are listed here, along with their descriptions and cross-references to similar
commands.
This chapter is not designed to be a comprehensive guide to all 8566A/B, 8568A/B, 8560 Series
commands. It gives brief descriptions of the supported commands, and highlights important functional or
behavioral differences that you should be aware of when transferring existing 8566A/B, 8568A/B, 8560
Series code to your X-Series analyzer. For a fuller description of the commands, refer to the 8566A/B,
8568A/B, 8560 Series Operating and Programming Manual.
To avoid confusion between numbers and letters, all commands that incorporate numbers have had the
number spelled out and placed in square brackets after the command. For example, the command ‘I1’ is
shown as ‘I1 [one]’ - that is, the capital letter ‘I’ followed by the number ‘1’, and then the word ‘one’
italicized in square brackets. The italicized word in brackets does not form part of the command.
78
Programming Commands
A1 [one] Clear Write for Trace A
A1 [one]
Clear Write for Trace A
Syntax
A1
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The A1 command sets Trace A to clear write which means that it continuously displays any signal
present at the analyzer input. The A1 command initially clears Trace A, setting all elements to zero.
NOTE
The functions of the command A1 are identical to the CLRW TRA command
(page 130).
79
Programming Commands
A2 [two] Maximum Hold for Trace A
A2 [two]
Maximum Hold for Trace A
Syntax
A2
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The A2 command updates each trace element with the maximum level detected during the period that the
trace has been active.
NOTE
80
The functions of the command A2 are identical to the MXMH TRA command
(page 271).
Programming Commands
A3 [three] View Mode for Trace A
A3 [three]
View Mode for Trace A
Syntax
A3
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The A3 command displays Trace A and then stops the sweep if no other traces are active. Trace A does
not get updated with new data.
NOTE
The functions of the command A3 are identical to the VIEW TRA command
(page 351).
81
Programming Commands
A4 [four] Blank Trace A
A4 [four]
Blank Trace A
Syntax
A4
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The A4 command blanks Trace A and stops the sweep if no other traces are active. Trace A is not
updated.
NOTE
82
The functions of the command A4 are identical to the BLANK TRA command
(page 115).
Programming Commands
ACPALPHA Adjacent Channel Power Alpha Weighting
ACPALPHA
Adjacent Channel Power Alpha Weighting
Syntax
ACPALPHA
SP
real
?
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
This command sets the alpha weighting for ACP measurements.
Range:
Any real number between 0 and 1
83
Programming Commands
ACPALTCH Adjacent Channel Power Alternate Channels
ACPALTCH
Adjacent Channel Power Alternate Channels
Syntax
ACPALTCH
SP
0
;
1
LF
2
?
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
The ACPALTCH command sets the number of alternate channels to be measured by an adjacent channel
power measurement to either 0, 1, or 2. The number of alternate channels is used with the ACPRSLTS
command (page 95).
Range:
0, 1, or 2.
Default value:
0.
84
Programming Commands
ACPBRPER Adjacent Channel Power Burst Period
ACPBRPER
Adjacent Channel Power Burst Period
Syntax
ACPBRPER
SP
real
S
;
MS
LF
US
CR
SC
?
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
The ACPBRPER command sets the cycle time (period) of the burst RF signal. The cycle time is needed
to set the sweep times when using the peak, two bandwidth, burst power, and gated methods for adjacent
channel power measurements.
NOTE
The N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG
method only and therefore, although the user can set ACPBRPER, it does not do
anything when in RLC mode.
85
Programming Commands
ACPBRWID Adjacent Channel Power Burst Width
ACPBRWID
Adjacent Channel Power Burst Width
Syntax
ACPBRWID
SP
real
S
;
MS
LF
US
CR
SC
?
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
The ACPBRWID command sets the on-time (pulse width) of the burst RF signal. The pulse width is
needed to set the gating times when using the gated method for adjacent channel power measurements.
Range
NOTE
86
5 μs to 9.5 seconds
The N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG
method only and therefore, although the user can set ACPBRWID, it does not do
anything when in RLC mode.
Programming Commands
ACPBW Adjacent Channel Power Bandwidth
ACPBW
Adjacent Channel Power Bandwidth
Syntax
ACPBW
SP
real
HZ
;
KHZ
LF
MHZ
CR
GHZ
UP
KZ
DOWN
MZ
SP
,
GZ
?
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
The ACPBW command sets the bandwidth of the channels as an active function for the ACPMEAS
(page 92) and ACPCOMPUTE (page 88) commands.
87
Programming Commands
ACPCOMPUTE Adjacent Channel Power Compute
ACPCOMPUTE
Adjacent Channel Power Compute
Syntax
ACPCOMPUTE
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Calculates the ACP of a transmitter based on data on the display. This function does not make a new
measurement before computing. The measurement must have been made with ANALOG or PEAK
method selected so the appropriate data is available for the calculation.
NOTE
88
The N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG
method only.
Programming Commands
ACPFRQWT Adjacent Channel Power Frequency Weighting
ACPFRQWT
Adjacent Channel Power Frequency Weighting
Syntax
ACPFRQWT
SP
RRCOS
;
OFF
LF
?
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
The ACPFRQWT command is used to control the frequency weighting when making an Adjacent
Channel Power measurement. Weighting is not used in the measurement if OFF has been selected.
Root-raised-cosine weighting is selected with the RRCOS parameter.
Default value:
NOTE
OFF
The N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG
method only.
89
Programming Commands
ACPLOWER Lower Adjacent Channel Power
ACPLOWER
Lower Adjacent Channel Power
Syntax
ACPLOWER
?
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
The ACPLOWER query command returns the power ratio result of the Adjacent Channel Power
measurement for the lower frequency channel.
NOTE
90
The N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG
method only.
Programming Commands
ACPMAX Maximum Adjacent Channel Power
ACPMAX
Maximum Adjacent Channel Power
Syntax
ACPMAX
?
;
LF
CR
SP
,
The ACPMAX query command returns the maximum adjacent channel power of the adjacent channel
power measurement.
NOTE
The N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG
method only.
91
Programming Commands
ACPMEAS Measure Adjacent Channel Power
ACPMEAS
Measure Adjacent Channel Power
Syntax
ACPMEAS
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
The ACPMEAS command makes a measurement and calculates the adjacent channel power (ACP) of a
transmitter. The measurement determines the leakage power that is in the channels adjacent to the
carrier. The result is the ratio of the leakage power in the channel adjacent to the total power transmitted
by the transmitter.
NOTE
92
The N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG
method only.
Programming Commands
ACPMSTATE Adjacent Channel Power Measurement State
ACPMSTATE
Adjacent Channel Power Measurement State
Syntax
ACPMSTATE
SP
CURR
;
DFLT
LF
?
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Sets the parameters of the measurement state to either the default state (determined by the setup) or the
current state. The state parameters that could change between the default state and a current state
include:
•
Resolution bandwidth
•
Video bandwidth
•
Span
•
Sweep time
•
Detector mode
•
Gating parameters
•
Trigger parameters
•
Video averaging
Default value:
NOTE
DFLT
The N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG
method only.
93
Programming Commands
ACPPWRTX Adjacent Channel Power Total Power Transmitted
ACPPWRTX
Adjacent Channel Power Total Power Transmitted
Syntax
ACPPWRTX
?
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
The ACPPWRTX query command returns the result of the total power transmitted calculation of the
adjacent channel power measurement. The measurement must be made with the analog or burst power
method selected.
NOTE
94
The N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG
method only.
Programming Commands
ACPRSLTS Adjacent Channel Power Measurement Results
ACPRSLTS
Adjacent Channel Power Measurement Results
Syntax
ACPRSLTS
?
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Returns an array of power data resulting from an ACP measurement of an RF signal. The number of
alternate channel pairs selected by the ACPALTCH (page 84) command determines the size of the array.
NOTE
The N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG
method only.
95
Programming Commands
ACPSP Adjacent Channel Power Channel Spacing
ACPSP
Adjacent Channel Power Channel Spacing
Syntax
ACPSP
SP
real
HZ
;
KHZ
LF
MHZ
CR
GHZ
UP
KZ
DOWN
MZ
SP
,
GZ
?
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Sets the channel spacing for the ACPMEAS (page 92) and ACPCOMPUTE (page 88) commands.
NOTE
96
The N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG
method only.
Programming Commands
ACPT Adjacent Channel Power T Weighting
ACPT
Adjacent Channel Power T Weighting
Syntax
ACPT
SP
real
S
;
MS
LF
US
CR
SC
SP
?
,
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
The ACPT command is used to set the T used in weighting for an adjacent channel power measurement.
NOTE
The N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG
method only.
97
Programming Commands
ACPUPPER Upper Adjacent Channel Power
ACPUPPER
Upper Adjacent Channel Power
Syntax
ACPUPPER
?
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
The ACPUPPER query command returns the power ratio result of the adjacent channel power
measurement for the upper frequency channel.
NOTE
98
The N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG
method only.
Programming Commands
ADJALL LO and IF Adjustments
ADJALL
LO and IF Adjustments
Syntax
ADJALL
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
The ADJALL command activates the RF local oscillator (LO) and intermediate frequency (IF)
alignment routines. These are the same routines that occur when the analyzer is switched on. They are
also the same routines that are performed when you press System, Alignments, Align Now, All.
Commands following ADJALL are not executed until after the analyzer has finished the alignment
routines.
99
Programming Commands
AMB A minus B into A
AMB
A minus B into A
Syntax
AMB
SP
SP
ON
;
OFF
LF
1
CR
0
SP
?
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The AMB command subtracts the points in Trace B from the corresponding points in Trace A, and sends
the results to Trace A. Thus, AMB can restore the original trace after an APB (page 103) or a KSc
(page 188) command has been executed.
The query command AMB? returns different responses depending on the language being used. The 8560
Series languages return either a 1 or a 0 to indicate the On or Off status.The 8566, 8568 Series languages
all return either ON or OFF.
NOTE
100
The functions of the command AMB are identical to the C2 [two] command
(page 120).
Programming Commands
AMBPL (A minus B) plus Display Line into A
AMBPL
(A minus B) plus Display Line into A
Syntax
8560 series:
AMBPL
SP
SP
ON
;
OFF
LF
1
CR
0
SP
?
,
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
AMBPL
;
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The AMBPL command does a point-by-point subtraction of Trace B from Trace A, and then adds the
display line point values to the difference. The results are sent to Trace A.
The query command AMBPL? returns different responses depending on the language being used.
Query response is either 1 or 0, indicating ON or OFF state for 8560 series, is ON or OFF indicating state
for 8566A/B, 8568A/B.
101
Programming Commands
ANNOT Annotation
ANNOT
Annotation
Syntax
ANNOT
SP
SP
ON
;
OFF
LF
1
CR
0
SP
?
,
Preset State: ANNOT ON
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The ANNOT command turns on or off all annotation on the analyzer display. Softkey labels are not
affected by this command and remain displayed.
NOTE
102
The functions of the command ANNOT are identical to the KSo command
(page 208) and KSp command (page 209). Note also that these two alternative
commands, KSo and KSp, are only valid when the remote language is either
HP8566A, HP8566B, HP8568A, or HP8568B.
Programming Commands
APB Trace A Plus Trace B to A
APB
Trace A Plus Trace B to A
Syntax
APB
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The APB command does a point-by-point addition of Trace A and Trace B, and sends the results to
Trace A. Thus, APB can restore the original trace after an AMB (page 100) or a C2 (page 120) command
has been executed.
NOTE
The functions of the command APB are identical to the KSc command (page 188).
Note also that the alternative command, KSc, is only valid when the remote
language is either HP8566A, HP8566B, HP8568A, or HP8568B.
103
Programming Commands
AT Input Attenuation
AT
Input Attenuation
Syntax
8560 Series:
AT
SP
number
DB
;
LF
UP
SP
DN
CR
AUTO
SP
MAN
,
OA
?
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
AT
SP
number
SP
UP
DB
;
DN
OA
?
Table 4-2
Item
Description/Default
Number
Any real number or
integer. If the value you
enter is not a valid value
for the analyzer you are
using, it switches
automatically to the
closest valid setting.
Default units are dB.
Range
0 to 70 dB specified absolutely
and
10 to 70 dB in 10 dB steps1
1. The range is limited to 0 to 60 dB if 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC is selected.
Preset State: 10 dB
Step Increment: 10 dB
104
Programming Commands
AT Input Attenuation
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Specifies the RF input attenuation.
Although the attenuation level in the X-series of analyzers can be specified using absolute values, you
can never set attenuation below 10 dB using the DOWN steps. This is a safety feature to prevent
inadvertent setting of attenuation to a level that could damage the analyzer.
NOTE
In PXA/MXA, the auto attenuation range is 6-70 dB and in EXA, it is 6-60 dB.
CAUTION
Signal levels above +30 dBm will damage the signal analyzer.
NOTE
You cannot step down below 10 dB. To set levels below 10 dB, you must specify
the attenuation absolutely. For example, to set attenuation to 0 dB, you must use
the command AT 0DB.
105
Programming Commands
AUNITS Absolute Amplitude Units
AUNITS
Absolute Amplitude Units
Syntax
8560 series
AUNITS
SP
AUTO
;
MAN
LF
DBM
CR
DBMV
SP
DBUV
V
,
W
DM
?
8566A/B, 8568A/B
AUNITS
DBM
SP
;
DBMV
DBUV
V
?
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Specifies the amplitude readout units for the reference level, the marker, and the display line.
NOTE
106
If your selected remote language is any of the 8560 Series analyzers, If the
AUNITS setting is AUTO, then a change from log scale (LG) to linear scale (LN)
automatically changes the AUNITS setting. For all other settings, no change to
AUNITS occurs, even when the scale is changed.
Programming Commands
AUNITS Absolute Amplitude Units
NOTE
The functions of the command AUNITS are identical to the commands KSA
(page 183), KSB (page 185), KSC (page 187), and KSD (page 189). Note also that
these four alternative commands, KSA, KSB, KSC, and KSD are only valid when
the remote language is either HP8566A, HP8566B, HP8568A, or HP8568B.
107
Programming Commands
AUTOCPL Auto Coupled
AUTOCPL
Auto Coupled
Syntax
AUTOCPL
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Sets video bandwidth, resolution bandwidth, input attenuation, sweep time and center frequency
step-size to coupled mode.
108
Programming Commands
AXB Exchange Trace A and Trace B
AXB
Exchange Trace A and Trace B
Syntax
AXB
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
This command exchanges Trace A and Trace B, point by point.
NOTE
The functions of the command AXB are identical to the EX command (page 155)
and to the XCH TRA,TRB command (page 354).
109
Programming Commands
B1 [one] Clear Write for Trace B
B1 [one]
Clear Write for Trace B
Syntax
B1
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The B1 command sets Trace B to clear write. That is, it continuously displays any signal present at the
analyzer input. The B1 command initially clears Trace B, setting all elements to zero. The sweep trigger
then signals the start of the sweep, and Trace B is continually updated as the sweep progresses.
Subsequent sweeps send new amplitude information to the display addresses.
NOTE
110
The functions of the command B1 are identical to the CLRW TRB command
(page 130).
Programming Commands
B2 [two] Maximum Hold for Trace B
B2 [two]
Maximum Hold for Trace B
Syntax
B2
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The B2 command updates each trace element with the maximum level detected while the trace is active.
NOTE
The functions of the command B2 are identical to the MXMH TRB command
(page 271).
111
Programming Commands
B3 [three] View Mode for Trace B
B3 [three]
View Mode for Trace B
Syntax
B3
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The B3 command displays Trace B and then stops the sweep if no other traces are active. Trace B does
not get updated.
NOTE
112
The functions of the command B3 are identical to the VIEW TRB command
(page 351).
Programming Commands
B4 [four] Blank Trace B
B4 [four]
Blank Trace B
Syntax
B4
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The B4 command blanks Trace B and stops the sweep if no other traces are active. Trace B is not
updated.
NOTE
The functions of the command B4 are identical to the BLANK TRB command
(page 115).
113
Programming Commands
BL Trace B minus Display Line to Trace B
BL
Trace B minus Display Line to Trace B
Syntax
BL
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The BL command subtracts the display line from Trace B and sends the results to Trace B.
The command BL is calculated differently depending on the language being used; for the 8560 Series the
calculation is performed in units of dBm.
8560 Series
The calculation is performed in units of dBm.
8566A
The calculation is performed in display units.
8566B
The calculation is performed in display units.
8568A
The calculation is performed in display units.
8568B
The calculation is performed in display units.
NOTE
114
The functions of the command BL are identical to the BML command (page 116).
Programming Commands
BLANK Blank Trace
BLANK
Blank Trace
Syntax
8560 Series:
BLANK
SP
TRA
;
TRB
LF
CR
SP
,
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
BLANK
SP
TRA
;
TRB
TRC
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Blanks Trace 1 or trace 2 and stops taking new data into the specified trace. TRA corresponds to Trace 1
and TRB corresponds to Trace 2.
For information on the trace settings of the X-series analyzers, see Table 4-4, “Legacy Products
command mapping to X-series for trace/detector settings.”
NOTE
The functions of the command BLANK are identical to A4 (page 82), B4
(page 113) or KSJ, and KSk command (page 200) command.
115
Programming Commands
BML Trace B Minus Display Line
BML
Trace B Minus Display Line
Syntax
BML
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The BML command subtracts the display line from trace B (point by point), and sends the difference to
trace B. Trace B corresponds to Trace 2.
The command BML is calculated differently depending on the language being used; for the 8560 Series
the calculation uses units of dBm.
For the 8566A, HP8566B, HP8568A, HP8568B - the BML command uses display units.
NOTE
116
The functions of the command BML are identical to the BL command (page 114).
Programming Commands
BTC Transfer Trace B to Trace C
BTC
Transfer Trace B to Trace C
Syntax
BTC
;
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The BTC command transfers Trace B data to Trace C
NOTE
Trace C cannot be an active trace. This means that the data in Trace C cannot be
updated as the analyzer sweeps. To ensure that the current settings of the analyzer
are reflected in the data transferred from Trace B to Trace C, you must follow the
four step process below.
•
Select single sweep mode (S2 or SNGLS command)
•
Select the desired analyzer settings
•
Take one complete sweep
•
NOTE
Transfer the data
The functions of the command BTC are identical to the KSl command (page 202).
117
Programming Commands
BXC Exchange Trace B and Trace C
BXC
Exchange Trace B and Trace C
Syntax
BXC
;
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The BXC command exchanges Trace B data with Trace C data.
NOTE
Trace C must not be an active trace. This means that the data in Trace C cannot be
updated as the analyzer sweeps. To ensure that the current settings of the analyzer
are reflected in the data exchanged between Trace B and Trace C, you must follow
the four step process below.
•
Select single sweep mode (S2 or SNGLS command)
•
Select the desired analyzer settings
•
Take one complete sweep
•
NOTE
118
Exchange the data
The functions of the command BXC are identical to the KSi command (page 197)
and to the XCH TRB,TRC command (page 354).
Programming Commands
C1 [one] Set A Minus B Mode Off
C1 [one]
Set A Minus B Mode Off
Syntax
C1
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The C1 command turns the A Minus B mode off. That is, it switches off the functionality that was
switched on by the C2 command (page 120) or by the AMB ON command (page 100).
NOTE
The functions of the command C1 are identical to the AMB OFF command
(page 100).
119
Programming Commands
C2 [two] A Minus B Into A
C2 [two]
A Minus B Into A
Syntax
C2
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The C2 command subtracts the points in Trace B from the corresponding points in Trace A, and sends
the results to Trace A. Thus, if your input signal remains unchanged, C2 can restore the original trace
after an APB command (page 103) or a KSc (page 188) command has been executed.
NOTE
120
The functions of the command C2 are identical to the AMB ON command
(page 100).
Programming Commands
CA Couple Attenuation
CA
Couple Attenuation
Syntax
CA
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
During normal operation, the analyzer’s input attenuation is coupled to the reference level. This coupling
keeps the mixer input at a level such that a continuous wave signal displayed at the reference level is at
or below -10 dBm (or the value specified in the ML command.)
The CA command sets the threshold to -10 dBm (or to the value specified by the ML command
(page 267) or the KS, command (page 179)). The counterpart to the CA command is the AT command
(page 104), which allows levels less than the threshold value at the mixer input.
121
Programming Commands
CARROFF Carrier Off Power
CARROFF
Carrier Off Power
Syntax
CARROFF
SP
TRA
,
?
TRB
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Measures the average and peak power of the carrier during the portion of time when the power is off
(when it is not within 20 dB of its peak level). The powers are combined to provide a calculation of the
leakage power.
The measurement needs to be in zero span for the measurement to run.
122
Programming Commands
CARRON Carrier On Power
CARRON
Carrier On Power
Syntax
CARRON
SP
TRA
,
?
TRB
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Measures the average power of the carrier during the portion of time when it is on and within 20 dB of its
peak level.
The measurement needs to be in zero span for the measurement to run.
123
Programming Commands
CF Center Frequency
CF
Center Frequency
Syntax
CF
SP
HZ
;
KHZ
LF
real
MHZ
CR
GHZ
KZ
MZ
SP
,
GZ
SP
UP
DN
OA
?
Table 4-3
Item
REAL
Description/Default
Any real or integer number.
Default unit is HZ.
Range
Frequency range of the analyzer
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The CF command specifies the value of the center frequency.
The step size depends on whether the frequency has been coupled to the span width using the CS
command (page 135). When coupled, the step size is 10% of the span, or one major graticule division;
when uncoupled, the step size is determined by the SS command (page 317).
NOTE
124
Although the analyzer allows entry of frequencies not in the specified frequency
range, using frequencies outside the frequency span of the analyzer is not
Programming Commands
CF Center Frequency
recommended and is not warranted to meet specifications.
125
Programming Commands
CHANNEL Channel Selection
CHANNEL
Channel Selection
Syntax
CHANNEL
SP
UP
;
DN
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Increments or decrements the analyzer center frequency by one channel spacing.
NOTE
126
The channel spacing value is set using the ACPSP command (page 96).
Programming Commands
CHANPWR Channel Power
CHANPWR
Channel Power
Syntax
CHANPWR
SP
TRA
,
real
TRB
HZ
KHZ
,
?
;
LF
MHZ
CR
GHZ
KZ
MZ
SP
,
GZ
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Measures the power within the specified channel bandwidth.
127
Programming Commands
CHPWRBW Channel Power Bandwidth
CHPWRBW
Channel Power Bandwidth
Syntax
CHPWRBW
SP
real
HZ
;
KHZ
LF
MHZ
CR
GHZ
KZ
MZ
SP
,
GZ
?
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Queries or sets the current value of the channel power bandwidth. Channel power can be measured with
the CHANPWR command (page 127).
128
Programming Commands
CLRAVG Clear Average
CLRAVG
Clear Average
Syntax
CLRAVG
;
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The CLRAVG command restarts the VAVG command by resetting the number of averaged sweeps to
one. The video averaging routine resets the number of sweeps, but does not stop video averaging. Use
"VAVG OFF;" to stop video averaging.
129
Programming Commands
CLRW Clear Write
CLRW
Clear Write
Syntax
CLRW
SP
TRA
;
TRB
Preset State: CLRW TRA
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Clears the specified trace and enables trace data acquisition. The CLRW command places the indicated
trace in clear-write mode. Data acquisition begins at the next sweep. (See the TS command (page 344)
for more information about data acquisition.)
TRA corresponds to Trace 1 and TRB corresponds to Trace 2.
NOTE
The functions of the command CLRW are identical to the A1 command (page 79)
and B1 command (page 110).
On the 8560 series, 8566A/B, and 8568A/B analyzers the trace settings are set by the trace mode
parameters, CLRW, VIEW, BLANK, MINH and MAXH and the averaging settings by VAVG. On the
X-series the same settings are set in the Trace/Detector and View/Blank parameters. The following table
describes what the N9061A application sets in the X-series box when the legacy commands for trace
mode and averaging are sent.
130
Programming Commands
CLRW Clear Write
Table 4-4
Legacy Products command mapping to X-series for trace/detector settings
Legacy Products
X-series
Trace
commands
Averaging
(VAVG)
Detector
(DET)
Trace/Detector
Trace Type
View/Blank
Detector
CLRW
Off
Normal
ClearWrite
On
Last set
CLRW
On
Sample
Trace Average
On
Sample
MXMH
Off
Peak
Max Hold
On
Peak
MXMH
On
Sample
Trace Average
On
Peak
MINH
Off
NegPeak
Min Hold
On
NegPeak
MINH
On
Sample
Trace Average
On
NegPeak
VIEW
Off
Normal
No change
View
No change
VIEW
On
Sample
Trace Average
View
Sample
BLANK
Off
Normal
No change
Blank
No change
BLANK
On
Sample
Trace Average
Blank
Sample
For example if the 8560 series sends CLRW and the averaging is set to ON, the 8560 series analyzer
detector is automatically set to Sample. The N9061A application sets the X-series instrument trace type
to Trace Average, View/Blank to On and the Detector to Sample.
131
Programming Commands
CONTS Continuous Sweep
CONTS
Continuous Sweep
Syntax
CONTS
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Preset State: CONTS
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The CONTS command sets the analyzer to continuous sweep mode. In the continuous sweep mode, the
analyzer takes its next sweep as soon as possible after the current sweep (as long as the trigger conditions
are met). A sweep may temporarily be interrupted by data entries made over the remote interface or from
the front panel.
NOTE
132
The functions of the command CONTS are identical to the S1 command
(page 306).
Programming Commands
COUPLE Input Coupling
COUPLE
Input Coupling
Syntax
COUPLE
SP
AC
;
DC
LF
?
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
The COUPLE command selects AC or DC coupling.
NOTE
When using the X-series analyzers, you must use DC coupling to see calibrated
frequencies of less than 20 MHz. Signals of less than 20 MHz are not calibrated
when using AC coupling on these analyzers.
133
Programming Commands
CR Couple Resolution Bandwidth
CR
Couple Resolution Bandwidth
Syntax
CR
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The CR command couples the resolution bandwidth to the span.
The counterpart to the CR command is the RB command (page 295) which breaks the coupling. Use the
CR command to re-establish coupling after executing an RB command.
NOTE
134
CR uses the legacy instrument settings for resolution bandwidth only if Mode
Setup > Preferences> Limit RBW/VBW is set to ON.
Programming Commands
CS Couple Frequency Step Size
CS
Couple Frequency Step Size
Syntax
CS
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The CS command couples the center frequency step size to the span width so that the step size equals
10% of the span width, or one major graticule division.
The counterpart to the CS command is the SS command (page 317) which breaks the coupling. Use the
CS command to re-establish coupling after an SS command has been executed.
135
Programming Commands
CT Couple Sweep Time
CT
Couple Sweep Time
Syntax
CT
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The CT command couples the sweep time to the span, resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth.
The counterpart to the CT command is the ST command (page 318) which breaks the coupling. Use the
CT command to re-establish coupling after an ST command has been executed.
136
Programming Commands
CV Couple Video Bandwidth
CV
Couple Video Bandwidth
Syntax
CV
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The CV command couples the video bandwidth to the resolution bandwidth.
The counterpart to the CV command is the VB command (page 347) which breaks the coupling. Use the
CV command to re-establish coupling after executing a VB command.
NOTE
CV uses the legacy signal analyzer settings for video bandwidth only if Mode
Setup > Preferences> Limit RBW/VBW is set to ON.
137
Programming Commands
DA Display Address
DA
Display Address
Syntax
DA
SP
number
;
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The DA command returns the contents of the given display address to the controller
NOTE
138
This command only supports the use of the DA 1, DA 1025, and DA 3073; these
display addresses contain the trace data and are equivalent to using the commands
TRA? (page 338), TRB? (page 339), TRC? (page 340), TA (page 330) and TB
(page 331).
Programming Commands
DELMKBW Occupied Power Bandwidth Within Delta Marker
DELMKBW
Occupied Power Bandwidth Within Delta Marker
Syntax
DELMKBW
SP
TRA
TRB
,
real
,
?
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Calculates the OBW with respect to the power between the displayed delta markers. The power between
the displayed markers is then used as the reference, rather than using the total power in the frequency
span as is done in the PWRBW (page 290) command.
If the DELMKBW command is used when no marker is active, a delta marker is activated at the center
frequency, and the returned bandwidth is 0. If the active marker is a normal marker when the
DELMKBW command is used, the marker type is changed to delta, and the returned bandwidth is 0.
139
Programming Commands
DET Detection Mode
DET
Detection Mode
Syntax
DET
SP
POS
;
SMP
LF
NEG
CR
NRM
?
SP
,
Preset State: DET NRM
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The DET command selects the type of analyzer detection (positive-peak, negative peak, sample, normal,
and so on).
POS
enables positive-peak detection, which displays the maximum video signal detected
over a number of instantaneous samples for a particular frequency.
SMP
enables sample detection, which uses the instantaneous video signal value. Video
averaging and noise-level markers, when activated, activate sample detection
automatically.
NEG
enables negative peak detection.
NRM
enables the ‘rosenfell’ detection algorithm that selectively chooses between positive
and negative values.
NOTE
140
The functions of the DET command are identical to the KSa command (page 184),
the KSb command (page 186), the KSd command (page 190), and the KSe
command (page 192).
Programming Commands
DL Display Line
DL
Display Line
Syntax
8560 series:
DL
SP
DB
;
DBM
LF
number
SP
UP
DBMV
DN
DBUV
OFF
MV
ON
UV
CR
SP
,
V
MW
UW
W
DM
?
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
DL
SP
number
;
UP
DN
OA
?
141
Programming Commands
DL Display Line
Table 4-5
Item
NUMBER
Description/Default
Any real or integer number.
Default units are dBm.
Range
Dependent on the reference level
Preset State: DL OFF
Step Increment: 1 major graticule division
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Defines the level of the display line and displays it on the analyzer screen.
142
Programming Commands
DLE Display Line Enable
DLE
Display Line Enable
Syntax
DLE
SP
ON
;
OFF
?
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Enables or disables the display line.
143
Programming Commands
DLYSWP Delay Sweep
DLYSWP
Delay Sweep
Syntax
DLYSWP
SP
number
US
;
MS
LF
SC
CR
S
ON
SP
SP
OFF
,
1
SP
0
?
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Delays the start of the sweep until the specified time after the trigger event has elapsed.
NOTE
144
A query response of 0 indicates that DLYSWP is switched off.
Programming Commands
DONE Done
DONE
Done
Syntax
DONE
?
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Allows you to determine when the analyzer has parsed a list of analyzer commands and has executed all
commands prior to and including DONE. The DONE command returns a value of “1” when all
commands in a command string or command list have been completed.
If a take sweep (TS command (page 344)) precedes the command list, the TS command acts as a
synchronizing function since the command list execution begins after the sweep has been completed.
145
Programming Commands
DR Display Read
DR
Display Read
Syntax
DR
;
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The DR command sends the contents of the current display address to the controller.
146
Programming Commands
E1[one] Peak Marker
E1[one]
Peak Marker
Syntax
E1
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The E1 command positions the marker at the signal peak.
NOTE
The functions of the E1 command are identical to MKPK (no secondary keyword)
and MKPK HI (page 255).
147
Programming Commands
E2 [two] Marker to Center Frequency
E2 [two]
Marker to Center Frequency
Syntax
E2
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The E2 command positions the marker on the screen at the center frequency position.
NOTE
148
Unlike MKCF (page 244), which moves the CF to the current position of the active
marker, the function of E2 centers the active marker to the center frequency on the
analyzer screen.
Programming Commands
E3 [three] Delta Marker Step Size
E3 [three]
Delta Marker Step Size
Syntax
E3
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The E3 command establishes the center frequency step size as being the frequency difference between
the delta marker and the active marker.
NOTE
The functions of the E3 command are identical to the MKSS command (page 262).
149
Programming Commands
E4 [four] Marker to Reference Level
E4 [four]
Marker to Reference Level
Syntax
E4
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The E4 command moves the active marker to the reference level.
NOTE
150
Unlike MKRL (page 260), which moves to the level of the delta Marker when in
delta Maker mode.
Programming Commands
EDITDONE Edit Done
EDITDONE
Edit Done
Syntax
EDITDONE
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
This command is used at the completion of limit-line editing within the EDITLIML command.
During the limit line commands beginning with EDITLIML and ending with EDITDONE, you can enter
the limit line data.
151
Programming Commands
ERR Error
ERR
Error
Syntax
ERR
?
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The ERR command returns a list of three-digit error codes if errors are present. A code of “0” means that
there are no errors present. Executing ERR? clears all GPIB errors.
If a command is a valid legacy command but not accepted by the N9061A application, no error message
is generated and the response to ERR? is 0. However, if logging is enabled, the N9061A application
command log registers a “Cmd not Supported” error.
If a command is not a valid legacy command, a command error is generated; CMD ERR is displayed on
the front panel and the response to ERR? is 112. If logging is enabled then Cmd Error is written to the
command error log.
Table 4-6
Error Code
112
Description
CMD ERR
Error codes are provided in RLC mode for some X-series errors such as external reference, hardware and
alignment errors. The X-series error codes are translated to 8560 series error codes so that an error query
returns the legacy instrument error code. To review the error via the front panel, select the System
hardkey and then select Show > Errors. The following table shows the X-series error codes and the
translated value.
152
Programming Commands
ERR Error
Table 4-7
X-series
error code
Description
8560 series
error code
Description
40
TG Alignment Failure
758
SYSTEM: Unknown system error
42
RF Alignment Failure
758
SYSTEM: Unknown system error
44
IF Alignment Failure
758
SYSTEM: Unknown system error
46
LO Alignment Failure
758
SYSTEM: Unknown system error
48
ADC Alignment Failure
758
SYSTEM: Unknown system error
50
FM Demod Alignment
Failure
758
SYSTEM: Unknown system error
54
Extended Align Failure
Sum
758
SYSTEM: Unknown system error
71
Characterize Preselector
Failure
758
SYSTEM: Unknown system error
-200.3310
Execution Error;
Preselector Centering
failed
758
SYSTEM: Unknown system error
503
Frequency Reference
Unlocked
336
10 MHz Ref Cal oscillator failed to lock
when going to internal 10 MHz
reference.
505
2nd LO Unlocked
336
10 MHz Ref Cal oscillator failed to lock
when going to internal 10 MHz
reference.
509
LO Unlocked
300
YTO UNL: YTO (1st LO) phase-locked
loop (PLL) is unlocked.
513
IF Synthesizer Unlocked
450
IF SYSTM: IF hardware failure. Check
other error messages.
515
Calibration Oscillator
Unlocked
336
10 MHz Ref: Cal oscillator failed to lock
when going to internal 10 MHz
reference
521
External Ref missing or
out of range
905,333
EXT REF: Unable to lock cal oscillator
when set to external reference. Check
that the external reference is within
tolerance.
600 UNLK: 600 MHz reference
oscillator PLL is unlocked
153
Programming Commands
ET Elapsed Time
ET
Elapsed Time
Syntax
ET
?
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
The ET command returns to the controller the elapsed time (in hours) of analyzer operation.
154
Programming Commands
EX Exchange Trace A and Trace B
EX
Exchange Trace A and Trace B
Syntax
EX
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
This command exchanges Trace A and Trace B, point by point.
NOTE
The functions of the EX command are identical to the AXB command
(page 109)and to the XCH TRA,TRB command (page 354).
155
Programming Commands
FA Start Frequency
FA
Start Frequency
Syntax
FA
SP
real
HZ
KHZ
;
LF
MHZ
CR
GHZ
KZ
MZ
SP
,
GZ
UP
SP
DN
OA
?
Table 4-8
Item
REAL
Description/Default
Any real or integer number.
Default unit is Hz.
Range
Frequency range of the analyzer
Step Increment: Frequency span divided by 10
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The FA command specifies the start frequency value. The start frequency is equal to the center
frequency minus (the span divided by two) (FA = CF − SP/2). Changing the start frequency changes the
center frequency and span.
NOTE
156
The OA parameter only returns the current value to the controller. It does not set
the active function to the start frequency.
Programming Commands
FB Stop Frequency
FB
Stop Frequency
Syntax
FB
SP
HZ
real
KHZ
;
LF
MHZ
CR
GHZ
KZ
MZ
SP
,
GZ
UP
SP
DN
OA
?
Table 4-9
Item
REAL
Description/Default
Any real or integer number.
Default unit is Hz.
Range
Frequency range of the analyzer
Step Increment: Frequency span divided by 10
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The FB command specifies the stop frequency value. The stop frequency is equal to the center frequency
plus the span divided by two (FB = CF + SP/2). Changing the stop frequency changes the center
frequency and span.
NOTE
The OA parameter only returns the current value to the controller. It does not set
the active function to the stop frequency.
157
Programming Commands
FDSP Frequency Display Off
FDSP
Frequency Display Off
Syntax
FDSP
OFF
SP
?
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
The FDSP command turns the frequency annotation OFF.
NOTE
158
It is not possible enable or disable the frequency annotation alone, leaving other
annotation unaffected. Thus, the FDSP command behaves in the same way as
ANNOT (page 102) If the FDSP command has been used to disable the frequency
annotation, sending the ANNOT ON command does not re-enable the display
annotation. The display annotation is only displayed by sending the IP (page 178)
command.
Programming Commands
FOFFSET Frequency Offset
FOFFSET
Frequency Offset
Syntax
FOFFSET
SP
real
HZ
;
KHZ
LF
MHZ
CR
GHZ
KZ
MZ
SP
,
GZ
UP
SP
DN
OA
?
Table 4-10
Item
REAL
Description/Default
Range
Any real or integer number.
Default unit is Hz.
Preset State: 0 Hz
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The FOFFSET command selects a value that offsets the frequency scale for all absolute frequency
readouts (for example, center frequency). Relative values such as span and marker delta are not offset.
When an offset is in effect, it is displayed beneath the bottom graticule line on the analyzer screen.
Execute “FOFFSET 0;” or “IP;” to turn off the offset.
159
Programming Commands
FOFFSET Frequency Offset
NOTE
160
The functions of the FOFFSET command are identical to the KSV command
(page 211).
Programming Commands
FPKA Fast Preselector Peak
FPKA
Fast Preselector Peak
Syntax
FPKA
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8566A/B
Description
The FPKA command automatically adjusts the preselector frequency to yield the greatest signal level at
the active marker. The FPKA command peaks the preselector faster than the preselector-peak command,
PP Although this command can be executed in all frequency spans, it performs best when the instrument
is in zero span. Use the standard preselector peak for all other frequency spans. The FPKA command
also returns the amplitude value of active marker.
161
Programming Commands
FREF Frequency Reference
FREF
Frequency Reference
Syntax
FREF
SP
INT
;
EXT
LF
?
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
The FREF command specifies whether an external source or an internal source is being used.
162
Programming Commands
FS Full Span
FS
Full Span
Syntax
FS
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
8560 series: The FS command sets the frequency span of the analyzer to full span. Resolution
bandwidth, video bandwidth, and sweep time are all set to auto-coupled.
8566A/B, 8568A/B: The FS command does an instrument preset, then sets the low band.
NOTE
The functions of the FS command are identical to the LF command (page 216).
NOTE
Whenever the frequency range of the analyzer you are using does not match the
remote language’s own range, the span is limited by the capabilities of the
replacement analyzer. The tables on the following pages list the frequency ranges
for all the supported remote languages when running on any of Agilent’s X-series
analyzers.
163
Programming Commands
FS Full Span
Table 4-11
PXA Series - Frequency Ranges Set by the FS Command
N9030A-503
N9030A-508
N9030A-513
N9030A-526
Remote
Language
Frequency Range
Frequency Range
Frequency Range
Frequency Range
8560E/EC
0 Hz - 2.9 GHz
0 Hz - 2.9 GHz
0 Hz - 2.9 GHz
0 Hz - 2.9 GHz
8561E/EC
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz
0 Hz - 6.5 GHz
0 Hz - 6.5 GHz
0 Hz - 6.5 GHz
8562E/EC
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz
0 Hz - 8.4 GHz
0 Hz - 13.2 GHz
0 Hz - 13.2 GHz
8563E/EC
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz
0 Hz - 8.4 GHz
0 Hz - 13.6 GHz
0 Hz - 27.0 GHz
8564E/EC
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz
0 Hz - 8.4 GHz
0 Hz - 13.6 GHz
0 Hz - 27.0 GHz
8565E/EC
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz
0 Hz - 8.4 GHz
0 Hz - 13.6 GHz
0 Hz - 27.0 GHz
8566A
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
8566B
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
8568A
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
8568B
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
Table 4-12
MXA Series - Frequency Ranges Set by the FS Command
N9020A-503
N9020A-508
N9020A-513
N9020A-526
Remote
Language
Frequency Range
Frequency Range
Frequency Range
Frequency Range
8560E/EC
0 Hz - 2.9 GHz
0 Hz - 2.9 GHz
0 Hz - 2.9 GHz
0 Hz - 2.9 GHz
8561E/EC
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz
0 Hz - 6.5 GHz
0 Hz - 6.5 GHz
0 Hz - 6.5 GHz
8562E/EC
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz
0 Hz - 8.4 GHz
0 Hz - 13.2 GHz
0 Hz - 13.2 GHz
8563E/EC
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz
0 Hz - 8.4 GHz
0 Hz - 13.6 GHz
0 Hz - 27.0 GHz
8564E/EC
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz
0 Hz - 8.4 GHz
0 Hz - 13.6 GHz
0 Hz - 27.0 GHz
8565E/EC
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz
0 Hz - 8.4 GHz
0 Hz - 13.6 GHz
0 Hz - 27.0 GHz
8566A
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
8566B
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
8568A
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
8568B
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
164
Programming Commands
FS Full Span
Table 4-13
EXA Series - Frequency Ranges Set by the FS Command
N9010A-503
N9010A-507
N9010A-513
N9010A-526
Remote
Language
Frequency Range
Frequency Range
Frequency Range
Frequency Range
8560E/EC
0 Hz - 2.9 GHz
0 Hz - 2.9 GHz
0 Hz - 2.9 GHz
0 Hz - 2.9 GHz
8561E/EC
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz
0 Hz - 6.5 GHz
0 Hz - 6.5 GHz
0 Hz - 6.5 GHz
8562E/EC
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz
0 Hz - 7.0 GHz
0 Hz - 13.2 GHz
0 Hz - 13.2 GHz
8563E/EC
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz
0 Hz - 7.0 GHz
0 Hz - 13.6 GHz
0 Hz - 27.0 GHz
8564E/EC
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz
0 Hz - 7.0 GHz
0 Hz - 13.6 GHz
0 Hz - 27.0 GHz
8565E/EC
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz
0 Hz - 7.0 GHz
0 Hz - 13.6 GHz
0 Hz - 27.0 GHz
8566A
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
8566B
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
8568A
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
8568B
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
165
Programming Commands
GATE Gate
GATE
Gate
Syntax
GATE
SP
SP
ON
;
OFF
LF
1
CR
0
SP
?
,
Preset State: GATE OFF
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Turns the time-gating function on or off. When the time-gating function is turned on, the analyzer
activates the time gate circuitry according to the parameters controlled by gate length (GL), gate delay
(GD) and the gate trigger input.
The query command GATE? returns different responses depending on the language being used.
8560 Series
166
Query response is either 1 or 0, indicating ON or OFF state.
Programming Commands
GATECTL Gate Control
GATECTL
Gate Control
Syntax
GATECTL
SP
EDGE
;
LEVEL
LF
?
CR
SP
,
Preset State: GATECTL EDGE
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Selects between the edge and level mode for time gate function. In the edge mode, a specified trigger
edge starts the gate delay timer that in turn starts the gate length timer. In the level mode, the gate follows
the trigger input level. The gate delay timer (GD) and the gate time length (GL) are operational in the
edge mode, but not in the level mode.
167
Programming Commands
GD Gate Delay
GD
Gate Delay
Syntax
GD
SP
US
real
MS
;
LF
SC
CR
S
SP
SP
UP
DN
,
OA
?
Preset State: 3 μs
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Sets the delay time from when the gate trigger occurs to when the gate is turned on. GD only applies if
GATECTL is set to EDGE.
168
Programming Commands
GL Gate Length
GL
Gate Length
Syntax
GL
SP
US
real
MS
;
LF
SC
CR
S
SP
SP
UP
DN
,
OA
?
Preset State: 1 μs
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Sets the length of time the time gate is turned on. GL only applies if GATECTL is set to EDGE.
169
Programming Commands
GP Gate Polarity
GP
Gate Polarity
Syntax
GP
SP
NEG
;
POS
LF
?
CR
SP
,
Preset State: GP POS
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Sets the polarity (positive or negative) for the gate trigger. If the gate control (GATECTL) is in the edge
mode, the gate delay timer can be triggered on either a positive or negative edge of the trigger input. If
the gate control is in level mode and positive is selected, the gate is on when the trigger input is high. If
the gate control is in level mode and negative is selected, the gate is on when the trigger is low.
170
Programming Commands
GRAT Graticule
GRAT
Graticule
Syntax
GRAT
ON
;
OFF
LF
1
CR
SP
SP
0
SP
?
,
Preset State: GRAT ON
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Turns the graticule on or off.
NOTE
The functions of the GRAT command are identical to the KSm command
(page 204) and the KSn command (page 206).
The query command GRAT? returns different responses depending on the language being used.
8560 Series
For Phoenix2 cut sentence above and paste here
8566A
Query response is either ON or OFF.
8566B
Query response is either ON or OFF.
8568A
Query response is either ON or OFF.
8568B
Query response is either ON or OFF.
171
Programming Commands
HD Hold Data Entry
HD
Hold Data Entry
Syntax
HD
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Disables data entry via the analyzer numeric keypad, knob, or step keys. The active function readout is
blanked, and any active function is deactivated.
172
Programming Commands
I1 [one] Set RF Coupling to DC
I1 [one]
Set RF Coupling to DC
Syntax
I1
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8568A/B
Description
The I1 [one] command sets the RF coupling to DC.
The tables below list the frequency specifications for all X-Series analyzers for both DC and AC
coupling.
Table 4-14
8568A/B Analyzer Frequency Coupling Specifications
DC Coupled Range
AC Coupled Range
Analyzer Model
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
8568A/B
100 Hz
1.5 GHz
100 kHz
1.5 GHz
Table 4-15
EXA Series Analyzer Frequency Coupling Specifications
DC Coupled Range
AC Coupled Range
Analyzer Model
(N9010A)
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
Option 503
9 kHz
3.6 GHz
10 MHz
3.6 GHz
Option 507
9 kHz
7.0 GHz
10 MHz
7.0 GHz
Option 513
9 kHz
13.6 GHz
10 MHz
13.6 GHz
173
Programming Commands
I1 [one] Set RF Coupling to DC
Table 4-15
EXA Series Analyzer Frequency Coupling Specifications
DC Coupled Range
AC Coupled Range
Analyzer Model
(N9010A)
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
Option 526
9 kHz
26.5 GHz
10 MHz
26.5 GHz
Table 4-16
MXA Series Analyzer Frequency Coupling Specifications
DC Coupled Range
AC Coupled Range
Analyzer Model
(N9020A)
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
Option 503
20 Hz
3.6 GHz
10 MHz
3.6 GHz
Option 508
20 Hz
8.4 GHz
10 MHz
8.4 GHz
Option 513
20 Hz
13.6 GHz
10 MHz
13.6 GHz
Option 526
20 Hz
26.5 GHz
10 MHz
26.5 GHz
Table 4-17
PXA Series Analyzer Frequency Coupling Specifications
DC Coupled Range
AC Coupled Range
Analyzer Model
(N9030A)
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
Option 503
3 Hz
3.6 GHz
10 MHz
3.6 GHz
Option 508
3 Hz
8.4 GHz
10 MHz
8.4 GHz
Option 513
3 Hz
13.6 GHz
10 MHz
13.6 GHz
Option 526
3 Hz
26.5 GHz
10 MHz
26.5 GHz
NOTE
174
The X-Series analyzers only have a single RF input port.
Programming Commands
I2 [two] Set RF Coupling to AC
I2 [two]
Set RF Coupling to AC
Syntax
I2
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8568A/B
Description
The I2 [two] command sets the RF coupling to AC.
The tables below list the frequency specifications for all X-Series analyzers for both DC and AC
coupling.
Table 4-18
8568A/B Analyzer Frequency Coupling Specifications
DC Coupled Range
AC Coupled Range
Analyzer Model
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
8568A/B
100 Hz
1.5 GHz
100 kHz
1.5 GHz
Table 4-19
EXA Series Analyzer Frequency Coupling Specifications
DC Coupled Range
AC Coupled Range
Analyzer Model
(N9010A)
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
Option 503
9 kHz
3.6 GHz
10 MHz
3.6 GHz
Option 507
9 kHz
7.0 GHz
10 MHz
7.0 GHz
Option 513
9 kHz
13.6 GHz
10 MHz
13.6 GHz
175
Programming Commands
I2 [two] Set RF Coupling to AC
Table 4-19
EXA Series Analyzer Frequency Coupling Specifications
DC Coupled Range
AC Coupled Range
Analyzer Model
(N9010A)
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
Option 526
9 kHz
26.5 GHz
10 MHz
26.5 GHz
Table 4-20
MXA Series Analyzer Frequency Coupling Specifications
DC Coupled Range
AC Coupled Range
Analyzer Model
(N9020A)
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
Option 503
20 Hz
3.6 GHz
10 MHz
3.6 GHz
Option 508
20 Hz
8.4 GHz
10 MHz
8.4 GHz
Option 513
20 Hz
13.6 GHz
10 MHz
13.6 GHz
Option 526
20 Hz
26.5 GHz
10 MHz
26.5 GHz
Table 4-21
PXA Series Analyzer Frequency Coupling Specifications
DC Coupled Range
AC Coupled Range
Analyzer Model
(N9030A)
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
Option 503
3 Hz
3.6 GHz
10 MHz
3.6 GHz
Option 508
3 Hz
8.4 GHz
10 MHz
8.4 GHz
Option 513
3 Hz
13.6 GHz
10 MHz
13.6 GHz
Option 526
3 Hz
26.5 GHz
10 MHz
26.5 GHz
NOTE
176
The X-Series analyzers only have a single RF input port.
Programming Commands
ID Identify
ID
Identify
Syntax
ID
SP
?
;
OA
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The ID command returns the current remote language to the controller (for example, “HP8563E”).
The response value is determined by your remote language selection. This is configured via the
front-panel menu selection in Mode Setup when in RLC mode. The remote language selection can also
be set using the SCPI command SYSTem:LANGuage.
ID? also works when you are not in RLC mode. In this case the instrument model number is returned.
The string that is returned is identical to the second field of text that is returned from the *IDN?
command.
For more information see:
“Setting up N9061A on the X-Series Analyzer” on page 27
“Running Software that Requires SCPI Commands” on page 38
177
Programming Commands
IP Instrument Preset
IP
Instrument Preset
Syntax
IP
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Performs an instrument preset, setting the analyzer back to its factory settings. IP does not affect the
contents of any data or trace registers or stored preselector data. IP does not clear the input or output data
buffers on the 8560-series analyzers, but does clear them on the 8566A/B, 8568A/B.
Instrument preset automatically occurs when you turn on the analyzer. IP is a good starting point for
many measurement processes. When IP is executed remotely, the analyzer does not necessarily execute a
complete sweep, however. You should execute a take sweep (TS) to ensure that the trace data is valid
after an IP.
The N9061A application executes this command after any language switch on the X-Series analyzer.
NOTE
The functions of the IP command are identical to the KST command (page 210).
NOTE
If the external amplifier gain has been set, executing an IP command does not reset
this value. This is to protect the analyzer.
178
Programming Commands
KS, Mixer Level
KS,
Mixer Level
Syntax
KS,
SP
real
DM
;
MV
UV
OA
?
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The KS, command specifies the maximum signal level that is applied to the input mixer for a signal that
is equal to or below the reference level.
The effective mixer level is equal to the reference level minus the input attenuator setting. When KS, is
activated, the effective mixer level can be set from -10 dBm to -70 dBm in 10 dB steps.
As the reference level is changed, the coupled input attenuator automatically changes to limit the
maximum signal at the mixer input to your specified setting for signals less than or equal to the reference
level.
NOTE
If the external amplifier gain has been set, executing an IP command will not reset
this value. This is to protect the analyzer.
NOTE
The functions of the KS, command are identical to the ML command (page 267).
179
Programming Commands
KS= 8566A/B: Automatic Preselector Tracking 8568A/B: Marker Counter Resolution
KS=
8566A/B: Automatic Preselector Tracking
8568A/B: Marker Counter Resolution
Syntax
KS=
SP
real
HZ
;
KZ
MZ
GZ
?
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
8566A/B: Use the KS= command to reinstate automatic preselector tracking after KS/ has been
executed. Normally, the center of the preselector filter automatically tracks signal responses in the four
frequency bands of the 2 to 22 GHz range.
The KS/ command allows manual adjustment of the preselector tracking and the X-Series analyzers can
swallow this command with no action.
8568A/B: Specifies the resolution of the marker frequency counter.
NOTE
180
For 8568A/B, the functions of the KS= command are identical to the MKFCR
command (page 248).
Programming Commands
KS( Lock Registers
KS(
Lock Registers
Syntax
KS(
;
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The KS( command secures the contents of registers one through six. When the registers are secured, the
SV and SAVE commands cannot save more instrument states in the registers, but instead write "SAVE
LOCK" on the analyzer display. To save an instrument state in a locked register, first execute KS) to
unlock the registers.
The recall function of the analyzer is not affected by this function.
181
Programming Commands
KS) Unlock Registers
KS)
Unlock Registers
Syntax
KS)
;
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The KS) command unlocks the registers where instrument states are stored with SV and SAVE
commands.
182
Programming Commands
KSA Amplitude in dBm
KSA
Amplitude in dBm
Syntax
KSA
;
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The KSA command sets the amplitude readout (reference level, marker, display line and threshold) to
dBm units.
NOTE
The functions of the KSA command are identical to the AUNITS DBM command
(page 106).
183
Programming Commands
KSa Normal Detection
KSa
Normal Detection
Syntax
KSa
;
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The KSa command selects normal input detection. That is, it enables the ‘rosenfell’ detection algorithm
that selectively chooses between positive and negative values.
NOTE
184
The functions of the KSa command are identical to the DET NRM command
(page 140).
Programming Commands
KSB Amplitude in dBmV
KSB
Amplitude in dBmV
Syntax
KSB
;
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The KSB command sets the amplitude readout (reference level, marker, display line and threshold) to
dBmV units.
NOTE
The functions of the KSB command are identical to the AUNITS DBMV
command (page 106).
185
Programming Commands
KSb Positive Peak Detection
KSb
Positive Peak Detection
Syntax
KSb
;
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The KSb command enables positive peak input detection for displaying trace information. Trace
elements are only updated when the detected signal level is greater than the previous signal level.
NOTE
186
The functions of the KSb command are identical to the DET POS command
(page 140).
Programming Commands
KSC Amplitude in dBuV
KSC
Amplitude in dBuV
Syntax
KSC
;
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The KSC command sets the amplitude readout (reference level, marker, display line and threshold) to
dBuV units.
NOTE
The functions of the KSC command are identical to the AUNITS DBUV command
(page 106).
187
Programming Commands
KSc A Plus B to A
KSc
A Plus B to A
Syntax
KSc
;
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The KSc command does a point-by-point addition of Trace A and Trace B, and sends the results to Trace
A. Thus, if your input signal remains unchanged, KSc can restore the original trace after an AMB or a C2
command has been executed.
NOTE
188
The functions of the command KSc are identical to the APB command (page 103).
Programming Commands
KSD Amplitude in Volts
KSD
Amplitude in Volts
Syntax
KSD
;
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The KSD command sets the amplitude readout (reference level, marker, display line and threshold) to
voltage units.
NOTE
The functions of the KSD command are identical to the AUNITS V command
(page 106).
189
Programming Commands
KSd Negative Peak Detection
KSd
Negative Peak Detection
Syntax
KSd
;
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The KSd command selects negative-peak input detection for displaying trace information. Each trace
element is updated with the minimum value detected during the sweep.
NOTE
190
The functions of the command KSd are identical to the DET NEG command
(page 140).
Programming Commands
KSE Title Mode
KSE
Title Mode
Syntax
KSE
char
real
terminator
;
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The KSE command activates the title mode, writing a message to the top line of the display.
NOTE
The only characters that the N9061A application accepts as a terminator are the
‘@’ character and the carriage return.
191
Programming Commands
KSe Sample Detection
KSe
Sample Detection
Syntax
KSe
;
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The KSe command selects sample input detection for displaying trace information.
NOTE
192
The functions of the command KSe are identical to the DET SMP command
(page 140).
Programming Commands
KSG Video Averaging On
KSG
Video Averaging On
Syntax
KSG
SP
average
length
;
ON
OA
?
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The KSG command enables video averaging. The averaged trace is displayed in Trace A.
If video averaging is off when either KSG? or KSG OA is sent to the instrument, video averaging is
turned on and the current average count is returned to the controller.
NOTE
The functions of the KSG command are identical to the VAVG ON command
(page 345).
193
Programming Commands
KSg Display Off
KSg
Display Off
Syntax
KSg
;
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The KSg command turns the analyzer’s display Off.
NOTE
194
On the legacy spectrum analyzers, this command turned the CRT beam power off
to avoid unnecessary wear on the CRT. Although this command is supported,
displays used on the X-Series analyzers have a much longer life than the CRTs
used in the legacy spectrum analyzers.
Programming Commands
KSH Video Averaging Off
KSH
Video Averaging Off
Syntax
KSH
;
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The KSH command switches video averaging Off.
NOTE
The functions of the KSH command are identical to the VAVG OFF command
(page 345).
195
Programming Commands
KSh Display On
KSh
Display On
Syntax
KSh
;
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The KSh command turns the analyzer’s display On.
NOTE
196
On the early models of spectrum analyzers, CRT beam power was often switched
Off to prevent wear of the CRT. This command (KSh) was used to turn the CRT
beam power on again. Although this command is supported, displays used on the
X-Series analyzers have a much longer life than the CRTs used in the legacy
spectrum analyzers.
Programming Commands
KSi Exchange Trace B and Trace C
KSi
Exchange Trace B and Trace C
Syntax
KSi
;
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The KSi command exchanges Trace B data with Trace C data.
NOTE
Trace C cannot be an active trace. This means that the data in Trace C cannot be
updated as the analyzer sweeps. To ensure that the current settings of the analyzer
are reflected in the data exchanged between Trace B and Trace C, you must follow
the four step process below.
•
Select single sweep mode (S2 (page 307) or SNGLS command (page 313))
•
Select the desired analyzer settings
•
Take one complete sweep using the TS command (page 344)
•
NOTE
Exchange the data
The functions of the command KSi are identical to the BXC command (page 118)
and the XCH TRB,TRC command (page 354).
197
Programming Commands
KSj View Trace C
KSj
View Trace C
Syntax
KSj
;
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The KSj command displays Trace C.
NOTE
198
The functions of the command KSj are identical to the VIEW TRC command
(page 351).
Programming Commands
KSK Marker to Next Peak
KSK
Marker to Next Peak
Syntax
KSK
;
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
If there is a marker on the screen, the KSK command moves this marker to the next signal peak of lower
amplitude.
NOTE
The functions of the KSK command are similar to the MKPK NH command
(page 255), except that KSK does not take into account the marker peak threshold
value or the marker peak excursion value. For more details on marker peak
threshold, see the MKPT command (page 256) and the TH command (page 333).
For more details on marker peak excursion, see the MKPX command (page 257).
199
Programming Commands
KSk Blank Trace C
KSk
Blank Trace C
Syntax
KSk
;
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The KSj command blanks Trace C.
NOTE
200
The functions of the command KSk are identical to the BLANK TRC command
(page 115))
Programming Commands
KSL Marker Noise Off
KSL
Marker Noise Off
Syntax
KSL
;
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The KSL command disables the noise density function which displays the RMS noise density at the
marker. KSL does not blank the marker.
NOTE
The functions of the KSL command are identical to the MKNOISE OFF command
(page 252).
201
Programming Commands
KSl Transfer Trace B to Trace C
KSl
Transfer Trace B to Trace C
Syntax
KSl
;
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The KSl command transfers Trace B data to Trace C
NOTE
Trace C cannot be an active trace. This means that the data in Trace C cannot be
updated as the analyzer sweeps. To ensure that the current settings of the analyzer
are reflected in the data transferred from Trace B to Trace C, you must follow the
four step process below.
•
Select single sweep mode (S2 (page 307) or SNGLS command (page 313))
•
Select the desired analyzer settings
•
Take one complete sweep using the TS command (page 344)
•
NOTE
202
Transfer the data
The functions of the command KSl are identical to the BTC command (page 117).
Programming Commands
KSM Marker Noise On
KSM
Marker Noise On
Syntax
KSM
;
?
OA
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The KSM command displays the noise density at the marker. The noise density is normalized to a 1Hz
bandwidth.
NOTE
The functions of the KSM command are identical to the MKNOISE ON command
(page 252).
203
Programming Commands
KSm Graticule Off
KSm
Graticule Off
Syntax
KSm
;
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The KSm command blanks the graticule on the analyzer display.
NOTE
204
The functions of the command KSm are identical to the GRAT OFF command
(page 171).
Programming Commands
KSN Marker Minimum
KSN
Marker Minimum
Syntax
KSN
;
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The KSN command moves the marker to the minimum value detected.
NOTE
The functions of the KSN command are identical to the MKMIN command
(page 250).
205
Programming Commands
KSn Graticule On
KSn
Graticule On
Syntax
KSn
;
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The KSn command turns on the graticule on the analyzer display.
NOTE
206
The functions of the command KSn are identical to the GRAT ON command
(page 171).
Programming Commands
KSO Marker Span
KSO
Marker Span
Syntax
KSO
;
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The KSO command operates only when the delta marker is On (see MKD (page 245) or M3 (page 229)).
When the delta marker is on and the KSO command is executed, the left marker specifies the start
frequency, and the right marker specifies the stop frequency. If the delta marker is off, the command
does nothing.
NOTE
If the active marker is not a delta marker, there is no change in its position.
NOTE
The functions of the KSO command are identical to the MKSP command
(page 261).
207
Programming Commands
KSo Annotation Off
KSo
Annotation Off
Syntax
KSo
;
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The KSo command blanks the annotation on the analyzer display.
NOTE
208
The functions of the command KSo are identical to the ANNOT OFF command
(page 102).
Programming Commands
KSp Annotation On
KSp
Annotation On
Syntax
KSp
;
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The KSp command activates the annotation on the analyzer display.
NOTE
The functions of the command KSp are identical to the ANNOT ON command
(page 102).
209
Programming Commands
KST Fast Preset
KST
Fast Preset
Syntax
KST
;
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Performs an instrument preset, setting the analyzer back to its factory settings.
NOTE
210
There is no fast preset for X-Series analyzers. Instead, the Code Compatibility
software performs an instrument preset (IP) when the KST command is issued.
The functions of the command KST are therefore identical to the IP command
(page 178).
Programming Commands
KSV Frequency Offset
KSV
Frequency Offset
Syntax
KSV
SP
real
HZ
;
KZ
MZ
GZ
OA
?
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The KSV command allows you to specify a value that offsets the frequency scale for all absolute
frequency readouts, for example, center frequency. Relative values, for example, span and delta marker,
are not offset.
NOTE
The functions of the KSV command are identical to the FOFFSET command
(page 159).
211
Programming Commands
KSx External Trigger
KSx
External Trigger
Syntax
KSx
;
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The KSx command activates the normal external trigger mode. When the KSx command is executed, the
RF input signal is only displayed when the external trigger level exceeds the trigger threshold level.
NOTE
If an 8566A/B or an 8568A/B analyzer is in zero span and the sweep time is less
than 20 msec, the display only gets refreshed when a fresh trace has been taken.
This can cause the displayed trace to flicker.
In the N9061A application of X-Series analyzers, all traces are displayed
continuously, so all traces are therefore free of flicker.
NOTE
212
The functions of the command KSx are identical to the TM EXT command
(page 337).
Programming Commands
KSy Video Trigger
KSy
Video Trigger
Syntax
KSy
;
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The KSy command activates the normal video trigger mode. When the KSy command is executed, the
RF input signal is only displayed when the video trigger signal, which is internally triggered off the input
signal, exceeds the trigger threshold level.
NOTE
If an 8566A/B or an 8568A/B analyzer is in zero span and the sweep time is less
than 20 msec, the display only gets refreshed when a fresh trace has been taken.
This can cause the displayed trace to flicker.
In the N9061A application of X-Series analyzers, all traces are displayed
continuously, so all traces are therefore free of flicker.
NOTE
The functions of the command KSy are identical to the TM VID command
(page 337) and to the T4 command (page 329).
213
Programming Commands
KSZ Reference Level Offset
KSZ
Reference Level Offset
Syntax
KSZ
SP
real
DM
;
MV
UV
OA
?
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The KSZ command offsets all amplitude readouts on the display but without affecting the trace. Note the
8566A/B only supports unit DM.
Once activated, the KSZ command displays the amplitude offset on the left side of the screen.
Entering KSZ 0 or presetting the spectrum analyzer eliminates an amplitude offset.
NOTE
214
The functions of the KSZ command are identical to the ROFFSET command
(page 304).
Programming Commands
L0 [zero] Display Line Off
L0 [zero]
Display Line Off
Syntax
L0
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The L0 [zero] command disables the display line.
NOTE
The functions of the L0 [zero] command are identical to the DLE OFF command
(page 143).
215
Programming Commands
LF Low Frequency Preset
LF
Low Frequency Preset
Syntax
LF
;
Legacy Products
8566A/B
Description
Performs a low frequency preset. That is, it selects a Start Frequency of 0 Hz and a Stop Frequency of
2.5 GHz, a Reference Level of 0dBm, and sets all coupled functions to automatic.
216
Programming Commands
LG Logarithmic Scale
LG
Logarithmic Scale
Syntax
LG
SP
number
DB
;
DM
LF
UP
SP
CR
DN
OA
SP
?
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Specifies the amplitude (vertical graticule divisions) as logarithmic units, without changing the reference
level. The integer ranges vary between the different remote languages. The following table lists the
ranges for each remote language.
Table 4-22
Remote Language
Integer Range using the
LG Command
8560E/EC
1, 2, 5, and 10
8561E/EC
1, 2, 5, and 10
8562E/EC
1, 2, 5, and 10
8563E/EC
1, 2, 5, and 10
8564E/EC
1, 2, 5, and 10
8565E/EC
1, 2, 5, and 10
8566A
1, 2, 5, and 10
8566B
1, 2, 5, and 10
8568A
1, 2, 5, and 10
217
Programming Commands
LG Logarithmic Scale
Table 4-22
Remote Language
8568B
218
Integer Range using the
LG Command
1, 2, 5, and 10
Programming Commands
LIMF Limit Line Frequency Value
LIMF
Limit Line Frequency Value
Syntax
LIMF
SP
number
HZ
;
KHZ
LF
MHZ
CR
GHZ
KZ
MZ
SP
,
GZ
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
The LIMF command is used to enter a frequency value for a limit-line segment.
NOTE
The response to the query command LIMF? is not supported by N9061A.
219
Programming Commands
LIMIFAIL Limits Failed
LIMIFAIL
Limits Failed
Syntax
LIMIFAIL
?
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
The LIMIFAIL command returns a number between 0 and 3 which specifies whether the active trace
passed or failed the upper and lower limit line tests. The meanings of the returned numbers are shown
below.
Table 4-23
Results of the LIMIFAIL Command
Result
Meaning
0
The active trace passed both the upper and the lower limit tests.
1
The active trace failed the lower limit test.
2
The active trace failed the upper limit test.
3
The active trace failed both the upper and the lower limit tests.
220
Programming Commands
LIMIPURGE Delete Current Limit Line
LIMIPURGE
Delete Current Limit Line
Syntax
LIMIPURGE
;
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
The LIMIPURGE command deletes the current limit line.
221
Programming Commands
LIMIREL Relative Limit Lines
LIMIREL
Relative Limit Lines
Syntax
LIMIREL
ON
SP
OFF
1
SP
0
?
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Specifies whether the current limit lines are fixed or relative.
222
;
Programming Commands
LIML Lower-Limit Amplitude
LIML
Lower-Limit Amplitude
Syntax
LIML
SP
number
DB
;
DBM
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
The LIML command assigns the lower-limit amplitude value to a limit-line segment.
223
Programming Commands
LIMTSL Slope Limit Line
LIMTSL
Slope Limit Line
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
The LIMTSL command makes the selected limit-line segment sloped. Default setting is sloped.
224
Programming Commands
LIMU Upper-Limit Amplitude
LIMU
Upper-Limit Amplitude
Syntax
LIMU
SP
number
DB
;
DBM
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
The LIMU command assigns the upper-limit amplitude value to a limit-line segment.
225
Programming Commands
LN Linear Scale
LN
Linear Scale
Syntax
LN
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Scales the amplitude (vertical graticule divisions) proportional to the input voltage, without changing the
reference level. The bottom line of the graticule represents 0 V.
226
Programming Commands
M1 [one] Marker Off
M1 [one]
Marker Off
Syntax
M1
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The M1 [one] command blanks any markers showing on the display.
NOTE
Unlike the MKOFF ALL command (page 253), it blanks inactive markers as well.
227
Programming Commands
M2 [two] Marker Normal
M2 [two]
Marker Normal
Syntax
M2
SP
real
HZ
;
KHZ
LF
MHZ
CR
GHZ
KZ
MZ
SP
UP
GZ
DN
S
OA
MS
SP
,
US
SC
?
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The M2 [two] command moves the active marker to the marker frequency. If the active marker type is
not currently normal (for example, if it is delta), the M2 command changes it to a normal marker.
NOTE
The functions of the M2 command are identical to the MKN command (page 251).
NOTE
If the active marker has not been declared with MKACT, a normal marker is
turned on and this active marker is assumed to be marker number 1 [one].
228
Programming Commands
M3 [three] Delta Marker
M3 [three]
Delta Marker
Syntax
M3
SP
real
HZ
;
KHZ
LF
MHZ
CR
GHZ
KZ
MZ
SP
UP
GZ
DN
S
OA
MS
SP
,
US
SC
?
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The M3 [three] command computes the frequency and amplitude difference between the active marker
and the delta (or difference) marker.
If a delta marker is not displayed on the screen, the M3 command places one at the specified frequency
or on the right hand edge of the display. If an active marker is not displayed on the screen, the M3
command places an active marker at the center of the screen.
NOTE
The active marker is the number 1 marker unless otherwise specified by the
MKACT command (page 242).
NOTE
The functions of the M3 command are identical to the MKD command (page 245).
229
Programming Commands
M4 [four] Marker Zoom
M4 [four]
Marker Zoom
Syntax
M4
SP
real
HZ
;
KHZ
MHZ
GHZ
KZ
MZ
SP
UP
GZ
DN
S
OA
MS
US
SC
?
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The M4 [four] command, when specifying either the UP or DN parameter, increases or decreases the
frequency span by one step. When specifying a numeric value, the M4 command moves the markers
horizontal (X) position to the specified position in frequency or time.
NOTE
230
The OA option only returns the current value to the controller; it does not set the
active function to the active marker.
Programming Commands
MA Marker Amplitude Output
MA
Marker Amplitude Output
Syntax
MA
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The MA command returns the amplitude level of the active marker if the marker is on the screen. If both
the active marker and the delta marker are displayed, the MA command returns the amplitude difference
between the two markers.
The format of the returned data when using the MKA command is dependent on the currently set trace
data format (refer to TDF, MDS, O1, O2, O3, or O4) when the selected remote language 8566.
8560 Series: The marker amplitude is always returned as an ASCII value (TDF P).
NOTE
The functions of the MA command are identical to the MKA command
(page 241).
231
Programming Commands
MC0 [zero] Marker Frequency Counter Off
MC0 [zero]
Marker Frequency Counter Off
Syntax
MC0
;
Legacy Products
8568A/B
Description
The MC0 [zero] command turns the marker frequency counter off.
NOTE
232
The functions of the MC0 [zero] command are identical to the MKFC OFF
command (page 247).
Programming Commands
MC1 [one] Marker Frequency Counter On
MC1 [one]
Marker Frequency Counter On
Syntax
MC1
;
Legacy Products
8568A/B
Description
The MC1 [one] command turns the marker frequency counter on.
NOTE
The functions of the MC1 [one] command are identical to the MKFC ON
command (page 247).
233
Programming Commands
MDS Measurement Data Size
MDS
Measurement Data Size
Syntax
MDS
B
SP
;
W
?
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The MDS command formats binary data in one of the following formats:
B
selects a data size of one 8-bit byte.
W
selects a data size of one word, which is two 8-bit bytes.
If no keyword is specified in the command, the default value of W is assumed.
234
Programming Commands
MEAN Trace Mean
MEAN
Trace Mean
Syntax
MEAN
SP
TRA
;
TRB
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Returns the mean value of the specified trace in display units.
NOTE
TRA corresponds to Trace 1 and TRB corresponds to Trace 2.
235
Programming Commands
MEANPWR Mean Power measurement
MEANPWR
Mean Power measurement
Syntax
MEANPWR
SP
TRA
TRB
,
number
,
?
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
The MEANPWR command measures the average power of the carrier during that portion of the time
when it is on. The on state is defined as the time when the signal is within a selected number of dB of its
peak level. The range of amplitudes that is defined as the on state can be set with the command. The
amplitude range is set relative to the peak value of the signal.
NOTE
236
The MEANPWR command is similar to the CARRON command (page 123),
except that the CARRON command defines ‘on’ as that time when the signal is
within 20 dB of its peak level.
Programming Commands
MEAS Meas
MEAS
Meas
Syntax
MEAS
?
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Returns the current sweep status. If the analyzer is set to sweep and make measurements continuously,
the command returns CONTS. If it is set to make a single sweep with a single measurement, the
command returns SNGLS.
The analyzer can be set to single sweep using the SNGLS command and it can be set to continuos sweep
using the CONTS command.
237
Programming Commands
MF Marker Frequency Output
MF
Marker Frequency Output
Syntax
8560 series:
MF
?
;
LF
CR
SP
,
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
MF
;
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Returns the frequency (or time) of the on-screen active marker. If both an active marker and the delta
marker are on the screen, the frequency difference is returned.
NOTE
238
8566 and 8568 only: If the active marker has marker frequency count set to On
when using the MF? command, the marker frequency count value is returned to the
controller.
Programming Commands
MINH Minimum Hold
MINH
Minimum Hold
Syntax
MINH
SP
TRA
;
TRB
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
The MINH command updates the chosen trace with the minimum signal level detected at each trace-data
point from subsequent sweeps.
For information on the trace settings of the X-series analyzers when legacy instrument trace settings are
sent, see Table 4-4, “Legacy Products command mapping to X-series for trace/detector settings.”
239
Programming Commands
MINPOS Minimum X Position
MINPOS
Minimum X Position
Syntax
MINPOS
SP
TRA
;
TRB
TRC
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The MINPOS command returns the X co-ordinate value that corresponds to the minimum amplitude of
the specified trace.
240
Programming Commands
MKA Marker Amplitude
MKA
Marker Amplitude
Syntax
MKA
?
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The MKA command returns the amplitude level of the active marker if the marker is on the screen. If
both the active marker and the delta marker are displayed, the MKA command returns the amplitude
difference between the two markers.
8560 Series: The marker amplitude is always returned as an ASCII value (TDF P).
8566 and 8568 Series: Specifies the amplitude of the active marker in dBm when the active marker is the
fixed or amplitude type (refer to the MKTYPE command).
NOTE
The functions of the MKA command are identical to the MA command
(page 231).
241
Programming Commands
MKACT Activate Marker
MKACT
Activate Marker
Syntax
MKACT
marker
number
SP
;
?
Table 4-24
Item
Marker
Number
Description/Default
Any valid integer. Default value is 1.
Range
1 to 4
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
MKACT specifies the active marker. There can be four different markers, but only one marker can be
active at any time.
242
Programming Commands
MKBW Marker Bandwidth
MKBW
Marker Bandwidth
Syntax
MKBW
SP
number
,
?
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Returns the bandwidth at the specified power level relative to an on-screen marker (if present) or the
signal peak (if no on-screen marker is present).
243
Programming Commands
MKCF Marker to Center Frequency
MKCF
Marker to Center Frequency
Syntax
MKCF
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Sets the center frequency equal to the marker frequency and moves the marker to the center of the
screen.
NOTE
244
The functions of the MKCF command are identical to the E2 command
(page 148).
Programming Commands
MKD Marker Delta
MKD
Marker Delta
Syntax
MKD
SP
real
HZ
;
KHZ
LF
MHZ
CR
GHZ
KZ
MZ
SP
UP
GZ
DN
S
OA
MS
SP
,
US
SC
?
Step Increment: by 1/10 of the frequency span
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The MKD command computes the frequency and amplitude difference of the active marker and the delta
marker. These values are displayed on the screen.
If a delta marker is not displayed on the screen, the MKD command places one at the specified frequency
or on the left or right hand edge of the display. If an active marker is not displayed on the screen, the
MKD command places an active marker at the center of the screen.
NOTE
For 8566A/B and 8568A/B, the functions of the MKD command are identical to
the M3 command (page 229).
245
Programming Commands
MKF Marker Frequency
MKF
Marker Frequency
Syntax
MKF
SP
real
HZ
;
KHZ
LF
MHZ
CR
GHZ
KZ
MZ
SP
UP
GZ
DN
S
OA
MS
SP
,
US
SC
?
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Specifies the frequency value of the active marker.
8560 Series: The data is returned in ASCII format.
For all other languages, the format of the returned data is determined by the TDF (Trace Data Format)
(page 332) command and, if TDF B (binary data format) has been selected, by the MDS command
(page 234).8566 and 8568 only: If the active marker has marker frequency count set to On when using
the MKF? command, the marker frequency count value is returned to the controller.
246
Programming Commands
MKFC Marker Counter
MKFC
Marker Counter
Syntax
MKFC
SP
SP
ON
;
OFF
LF
1
CR
0
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Turns on or off the marker frequency counter. The resolution of the frequency marker counter is
determined by the MKFCR command (page 248).
NOTE
The functions of the MKFC command are identical to the MC0 [zero] command
(page 232) and MC1 [one] command (page 233).
NOTE
For 8568A/B, the functions of the MKFC command are identical to the MC0 or
MC1 command.
247
Programming Commands
MKFCR Marker Counter Resolution
MKFCR
Marker Counter Resolution
Syntax
8560 series:
MKFCR
real
SP
HZ
;
KHZ
LF
MHZ
CR
GHZ
SP
KZ
,
MZ
GZ
OA
SP
?
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
MKFCR
SP
real
HZ
KHZ
MHZ
GHZ
KZ
MZ
UP
SP
DN
OA
?
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
248
GZ
;
Programming Commands
MKFCR Marker Counter Resolution
Description
Sets the resolution of the marker frequency counter. The marker counter resolution value is always given
either in Hertz or in seconds depending on whether the analyzer is operating in the frequency domain or
the time domain.
NOTE
For 8566A/B, 8568A/B, the functions of the MKFCR command are identical to the
KS= command (page 180).
249
Programming Commands
MKMIN Marker Minimum
MKMIN
Marker Minimum
Syntax
MKMIN
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Moves the active marker to the minimum value detected.
NOTE
250
For 8566A/B, 8568A/B, the functions of the MKMIN command are identical to
the KSN command (page 205).
Programming Commands
MKN Marker Normal
MKN
Marker Normal
Syntax
MKN
SP
real
HZ
;
KHZ
LF
MHZ
CR
GHZ
KZ
MZ
SP
UP
GZ
DN
S
OA
MS
SP
,
US
SC
?
Step Increment: by 1/10 of the frequency span.
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The MKN command moves the active marker to the specified frequency. If no marker is currently turned
on, a normal marker is turned on. If the active marker type is not currently normal (for example, it is
delta), the MKN command changes it to a normal marker.
NOTE
The functions of the MKN command are identical to the M2 [two] command
(page 228).
251
Programming Commands
MKNOISE Marker Noise
MKNOISE
Marker Noise
Syntax
MKNOISE
ON
;
OFF
LF
1
CR
SP
SP
0
SP
?
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Displays the average RMS noise density at the marker.
NOTE
252
For 8566A/B, 8568A/B, the functions of the MKNOISE command are identical to
the KSM command (page 203).
Programming Commands
MKOFF Marker Off
MKOFF
Marker Off
Syntax
MKOFF
SP
ALL
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Turns off either the active marker or all the markers. If the ALL parameter is omitted, only the active
marker is turned off.
253
Programming Commands
MKP Marker Position
MKP
Marker Position
Syntax
MKP
SP
integer
?
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Specifies the marker position horizontally, in display units.
254
;
Programming Commands
MKPK Marker Peak
MKPK
Marker Peak
Syntax
MKPK
SP
HI
;
NH
LF
NR
CR
NL
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Executing MKPK HI, or simply MKPK (no secondary keyword), positions the active marker at the
highest signal detected. If an active marker is on the screen, the MKPK parameters move the marker as
follows:
HI (highest)
moves the active marker to the highest peak.
NH (next highest) moves the active marker to the next signal peak of lower amplitude.
NR (next right)
moves the active marker to the next signal peak to the right of the current marker.
NL (next left)
moves the active marker to the next signal peak to the left of the current marker.
NOTE
The functions of the MKPK command (no secondary keyword) and the MKPK HI
command are identical to the E1 commands: (page 147).
NOTE
For 8566A/B, 8568A/B, the functions of the MKPK NH command are similar to
the KSK command (page 199), except that KSK does not take in to account the
marker peak excursion or marker peak threshold values. For more details on
marker peak excursion, see the MKPX command (page 257).
255
Programming Commands
MKPT Marker Threshold
MKPT
Marker Threshold
Syntax
MKPT
SP
number
SP
UP
DN
DBM
;
LF
CR
OA
SP
?
,
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
The MKPT command sets the minimum amplitude level from which a peak on the trace can be detected.
256
Programming Commands
MKPX Marker Peak Excursion
MKPX
Marker Peak Excursion
Syntax
MKPX
SP
SP
real
UP
DN
DB
;
LF
CR
OA
?
SP
,
Preset State: 6 dB
Step Increment: 1 dB
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Specifies the minimum signal excursion for the analyzer’s internal peak identification routine.
The default value is 6 dB. In this case, any signal with an excursion of less than 6 dB on either side of the
marker would not be identified. Thus, if an MKPK NH command were to be executed on such a signal,
the analyzer would not place a marker on this signal peak.
257
Programming Commands
MKREAD Marker Readout
MKREAD
Marker Readout
Syntax
MKREAD
FRQ
SP
;
SWT
IST
PER
?
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Selects the type of active trace information displayed by the spectrum analyzer marker readout.
The MKREAD command can select the following types of active trace information:
FRQ
frequency
SWT
sweep time
IST
inverse sweep time
PER
period
NOTE
The Inverse Sweep Time (IST) readout is only available when using a delta marker
in zero span.
The results of the data depend on the MKREAD parameter and the frequency span, and whether the
marker delta function is used.
Table 4-25
MKREAD
Type
FRQ
258
Non-Zero Span
Reads frequency
Non-Zero Span
Delta
Reads delta
frequency
Zero Span
N/A
Zero Span Delta
N/A
Programming Commands
MKREAD Marker Readout
Table 4-25
MKREAD
Type
Non-Zero Span
Non-Zero Span
Delta
Zero Span
Zero Span Delta
SWT
Reads time since the
start of sweep
Reads delta time
between end points
Waveform
measurements of
detected
modulation
Waveform
measurements of
detected modulation
IST
N/A
N/A
N/A
Computes frequency
corresponding to
delta of markers.
Performs
1/ (T1 − T2)
PER
Period of frequency
(Pulse measurement)
delta time
N/A
N/A
NOTE
FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) is not available in the Programming Code
Compatibility Suite option.
259
Programming Commands
MKRL Marker to Reference Level
MKRL
Marker to Reference Level
Syntax
MKRL
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The MKRL command moves the active marker to the reference level.
NOTE
260
The functions of the MKRL command are identical to the E4 command
(page 150).
Programming Commands
MKSP Marker Span
MKSP
Marker Span
Syntax
MKSP
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The MKSP command operates only when the delta marker is On (see MKD (page 245) or M3
(page 229)). When the delta marker is On and MKSP is executed, the delta marker and active marker
determine the start and stop frequencies. The left marker specifies the start frequency, and the right
marker specifies the stop frequency. If marker delta is Off, there is no operation.
NOTE
If the active marker is not a delta marker, there is no change in its position.
NOTE
For 8566A/B, 8568A/B, The functions of the MKSP command are identical to the
KSO command (page 207).
261
Programming Commands
MKSS Marker to Step Size
MKSS
Marker to Step Size
Syntax
MKSS
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Sets the center-frequency step-size equal to the marker frequency. If the analyzer is in the delta mode,
the step size is set to the frequency difference between the active and the delta marker.
NOTE
262
When the marker is a delta marker, the functions of the MKSS command are
identical to the E3 command (page 149).
Programming Commands
MKT Marker Time
MKT
Marker Time
Syntax
MKT
SP
real
S
;
MS
LF
US
CR
SC
OA
?
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Places a marker at a position that corresponds to a specified point in time during the sweep.
NOTE
The default unit of time is seconds (‘S’ or ‘SC’).
263
Programming Commands
MKTRACE Marker Trace
MKTRACE
Marker Trace
Syntax
MKTRACE
TRA
SP
;
TRB
TRC
?
NOTE
TRA corresponds to Trace 1, TRB corresponds to Trace 2, and TRC corresponds
to Trace 3.
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Moves the active marker to the corresponding position in Trace 1, Trace 2, or Trace 3.
264
Programming Commands
MKTRACK Marker Track
MKTRACK
Marker Track
Syntax
MKTRACK
SP
SP
ON
;
OFF
LF
1
CR
0
SP
?
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Moves the signal on which the active marker is located to the center of the analyzer display and keeps the
signal peak at center screen.
To keep a drifting signal at center screen, place the active marker on the desired signal before turning on
MKTRACK.
NOTE
For 8566A/B, 8568A/B, the functions of the MKTRACK command are identical
to the MT0 [zero] command (page 269) and the MT1 [one] command (page 270).
265
Programming Commands
MKTYPE Marker Type
MKTYPE
Marker Type
Syntax
MKTYPE
SP
PSN
;
AMP
FIXED
?
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Specifies the type of marker.
MKTYPE PSN allows the marker to be positioned horizontally in display units (default). Use the MKP
and MKF commands to position the marker.
MKTYPE AMP allows the marker to be positioned according to amplitude. Use the MKA command to
position the marker.
MKTYPE FIXED allows a marker to be placed at any fixed point on the display. Use the MKP, MKF,
and MKA commands to position the marker.
NOTE
266
Marker type can only be set for an active marker. The marker type is reset to PSN
when the marker is turned off (using the MKOFF command) or the instrument is
preset.
Programming Commands
ML Mixer Level
ML
Mixer Level
Syntax
8560 series:
ML
SP
DBM
real
SP
;
UP
LF
DN
CR
?
SP
,
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
ML
SP
real
DB
;
DM
SP
UP
MV
DN
UV
OA
?
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The ML command specifies the maximum signal level that is applied to the input mixer for a signal that
is equal to or below the reference level.
The effective mixer level is equal to the reference level minus the input attenuator setting.
267
Programming Commands
ML Mixer Level
NOTE
If an external amplifier gain value is set, the mixer level is determined using the
following equation:
Mixer Level = Ref. Level - Attenuation + Ext. Amplifier Gain
The external amplifier gain is not preset by doing an IP command in case the
analyzer is measuring a large signal. This is to protect the analyzer from damage
from a large signal. For a helpful suggestion, see Chapter 3 , “Hints and Tips,” on
page 71.
NOTE
268
For 8566A/B, 8568A/B, the functions of the ML command are identical to the KS,
command (page 179).
Programming Commands
MT0 [zero] Marker Track Off
MT0 [zero]
Marker Track Off
Syntax
MT0
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The MT0 [zero] command disables the marker tracking mode.
NOTE
The functions of the MT0 [zero] command are identical to the MKTRACK OFF
command (page 265).
269
Programming Commands
MT1 [one] Marker Track On
MT1 [one]
Marker Track On
Syntax
MT1
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Moves the signal on which the active marker is located to the center of the analyzer display and keeps the
signal peak at center screen.
To keep a drifting signal at center screen, place the active marker on the desired signal before issuing an
MT1 [one] command.
NOTE
270
The functions of the MT1 command are identical to the MKTRACK ON command
(page 265).
Programming Commands
MXMH Maximum Hold
MXMH
Maximum Hold
Syntax
MXMH
SP
TRA
;
TRB
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Updates each trace element with the maximum level detected.
MXMH updates the specified trace (either Trace A or Trace B) with a new value from a detector only if
the new value is larger than the previous trace data value.
NOTE
The functions of the MXMH command are identical to the A2 command
(page 80)and B2 command (page 111).
NOTE
TRA corresponds to Trace 1 and TRB corresponds to Trace 2.
For information on the trace settings of the X-series analyzers when legacy instrument trace settings are
sent, see Table 4-4, “Legacy Products command mapping to X-series for trace/detector settings.”
271
Programming Commands
NORMLIZE Normalize Trace Data
NORMLIZE
Normalize Trace Data
Syntax
NORMLIZE
SP
ON
;
OFF
LF
OA
CR
1
SP
0
?
SP
,
The preset state is OFF.
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Activates or de-activates the normalization routine for stimulus-response measurements. This function
subtracts trace B from trace A, offsets the result by the value of the normalized reference position (NRL)
and displays the result in trace A.
If active (ON), the NORMLIZE command is automatically turned off with an instrument preset (IP) or at
power on.
The OA option only returns the current value to the controller; it does not set the active function to the
normalization state.
Normalization is not available when using linear mode and is mutually exclusive with other trace math.
272
Programming Commands
NRL Normalized Reference Level
NRL
Normalized Reference Level
Syntax
NRL
SP
number
DB
LF
LF
?
CR
SP
,
The preset value is 0 dB.
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Sets the normalized reference level. It is intended to be used with the NORMLIZE command. When
using NRL, the input attenuator and IF step gains are not affected. This function is a trace-offset function
enabling the user to offset the displayed trace without introducing hardware switching errors into the
stimulus-response measurement. The unit of measure for NRL is dB.
273
Programming Commands
NRPOS Normalized Reference Position
NRPOS
Normalized Reference Position
Syntax
NRPOS
SP
number
;
SP
UP
LF
DN
CR
OA
?
SP
,
The preset value is 10.
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
The NRPOS command adjusts the normalized reference-position that corresponds to the position on the
graticule where the difference between the measured and calibrated traces reside. The dB value of the
normalized reference position is equal to the normalized reference level. The normalized reference
position can be adjusted between 0.0 and 10.0, corresponding to the bottom and top graticule lines,
respectively.
274
Programming Commands
O1 [one] Format - Display Units
O1 [one]
Format - Display Units
Syntax
O1
;
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The O1 [one] command transmits trace amplitude and position information as decimal values in display
units.
275
Programming Commands
O2 [two] Format - Two 8-Bit Bytes
O2 [two]
Format - Two 8-Bit Bytes
Syntax
O2
;
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The O2 [two] command transmits trace amplitude and position information as two 8-bit binary numbers,
or one instruction word.
276
Programming Commands
O3 [three] Format - Real Amplitude Units
O3 [three]
Format - Real Amplitude Units
Syntax
O3
;
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The O3 [three] command transmits trace vertical axis information only, in measurement units of Hz,
dBm, dB, volts or seconds.
277
Programming Commands
O4 [four] Format - One 8-Bit Byte
O4 [four]
Format - One 8-Bit Byte
Syntax
O4
;
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The O4 [four] command transmits trace amplitude information only as a binary number.
278
Programming Commands
OA or ? Query Active Function
OA or ?
Query Active Function
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Query active function.
The active functions are ACPBW, ACPSP, AT, CF, CRTHPOS, CRTVPOS, DA, DL, DOTDENS, FA,
FB, FMGAIN, GD, GL, LG, MKA, MKD, MKFCR, MKN, MKPAUSE, MKPX, ML, NDB, NRL, RB,
RCLS, ROFFSET, RL, RLPOS, SAVES, SAVRCLN, SETDATE, SETTIME, SP, SQLCH, SRCALC,
SRCAT, SRCPOFS, SRCPSWP, SRCPWR, SRCTK, SS, ST, TH, TVLINE, VB, VBR, and
user-defined active function specified by the ACTDEF command.
279
Programming Commands
OCCUP Percent Occupied Power Bandwidth
OCCUP
Percent Occupied Power Bandwidth
Syntax
OCCUP
SP
number
?
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
The OCCUP command is used to query the current value of the percent occupied power. This value is set
by the DELMKBW (page 139) and the PWRBW command (page 290) command. The OCCUP
command can also be used to set the percent occupied power.
280
Programming Commands
OL Output Learn String
OL
Output Learn String
Syntax
OL
SP
80 byte binary
string
;
?
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The OL command transmits information to the controller that describes the state of the analyzer when
the OL command is executed. This information is called the “learn string.” The learn string can be sent
from the controller memory back to the analyzer to restore the analyzer to its original state.
NOTE
The OL command is not completely supported, due to differences between the
X-Series and 8566/8568. The following table outlines each byte of the array and
the bits supported within that byte.
Byte
Support Information
1
Fixed decimal value 31
2
Fixed decimal value 118
3 to 9
Supported
10
Supported
11
Unsupported: Fixed decimal 0
12 to 17
Supported
18
Supported: Bits 6, 2, 1 and 0
Unsupported: Bits 7, 5, 4, and 3
281
Programming Commands
OL Output Learn String
Byte
Support Information
19
Supported:
Bits 7, 6, 4, 3, and 0
Bit 5 on X-Series only
Unsupported:
Bits 1 and 2
20
Supported: Trigger Mode, Sweep Mode, TRB
Clearwrite status
Unsupported: Recorder Output
21
Supported
22
Unsupported: Fixed decimal 0
23 to 25
Supported
26
Supported: Scale Type, Log Scale Factor, and
Display State
Unsupported: XY Recorder
27
Supported
28
Unsupported: Fixed decimal 0
29 to 30
Supported
31
Unsupported: Fixed decimal 0
32 to 37
Supported
38
Unsupported: Fixed decimal 0
39 to 45
Supported
46 to 47
VAVG count limit, value returned is always
current count value * 2.
48 to 53
Supported
54 to 57
If active marker is a delta marker, active marker
absolute Y position only supported for X-Series
58 to 61
If active marker is a delta marker, reference
marker absolute Y position only supported for
X-Series
62
Unsupported: Fixed decimal 0
63
Supported
64
Supported: Log Amp Units, R3, R2, and R4
Unsupported: Stop sweep
282
Programming Commands
OL Output Learn String
Byte
Support Information
65
Supported: Lin Amp Units, TRC View Status
Unsupported: Bits 5 and 4 (always set HI)
66 to 71
Supported
72
Unsupported: Fixed decimal 0
73
Supported: Video Avg
Unsupported: Power on last, Ext Ref Lvl, Fast
HP-IB, Bit 4 (always set HI)
74 to 77
Unsupported: Fixed decimal 0
78
Unsupported
79
Unsupported: Fixed decimal 0
80
Fixed decimal 162
283
Programming Commands
OT Output Trace Annotations
OT
Output Trace Annotations
Syntax
OT
;
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The OT command sends 32 character-strings to the controller. Each character-string can be up to 64
characters long.
NOTE
284
The 'data invalid indicator' status report given in string 27 of the returned text is
only supported on X-Series analyzers.
Programming Commands
PEAKS Peaks
PEAKS
Peaks
Syntax
8560 series:
PEAKS
SP
TRA
,
TRA
,
AMP
TRB
SP
TRB
SP
FRQ
?
;
AMP
;
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
PEAKS
SP
TRA
,
TRA
TRB
TRB
TRC
TRC
,
FRQ
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The PEAKS command sorts the signal peaks in the source trace by frequency or amplitude, and sends
the results to destination trace.
285
Programming Commands
PKPOS Peak Position
PKPOS
Peak Position
Syntax
PKPOS
SP
TRA
;
TRB
TRC
Legacy Products
8568
Description
The PKPOS command returns the X co-ordinate value of the maximum peak in the specified trace.
286
Programming Commands
PLOT Plot
PLOT
Plot
Syntax
PLOT
SP
value
,
value
,
value
,
value
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The PLOT command allows you transfer trace data, graticule and annotation information to a printer
using a parallel port.
The legacy analyzers transferred data directly to a plotter via the GPIB connection. The PLOT command
now transfers data to a printer, and prints the entire screen.
Although the PLOT command reads in plotter dimension values, these are ignored.
NOTE
In legacy instruments, the PLOT command also returns HPGL. The X-series
instruments with the N9061A application installed does not return HPGL.
287
Programming Commands
PP Preselector Peak
PP
Preselector Peak
Syntax
PP
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B
Description
The PP command optimizes preselector tracking to peak the amplitude of a signal at the active marker. If
a marker is not on the screen, PP places a marker at the highest signal level, and optimizes preselector
tracking at that frequency.
NOTE
288
This command is only supported when the X-series analyzer’s maximum
frequency limit is greater than 3.6 GHz. If the command is issued on an analyzer
with a maximum frequency limit of 3.6 GHz or less the command is not
implemented and no error is generated.
Programming Commands
PRINT Print
PRINT
Print
Syntax
PRINT
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Transfers trace data, graticule and annotation of the analyzer screen directly to the X-series analyzer’s
default printer.
289
Programming Commands
PWRBW Power Bandwidth
PWRBW
Power Bandwidth
Syntax
8560 Series:
PWRBW
TRA
SP
,
number
?
;
TRB
LF
CR
SP
,
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
PWRBW
SP
TRA
,
number
?
;
TRB
TRC
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Computes the combined power of all signal responses in the specified trace, and returns the bandwidth of
the specified percentage of total power. The number in the command is a percentage value, that is, it has
a range of 0 to 100.
NOTE
If the percent total power is 100%, the power bandwidth equals the frequency
span.
NOTE
On the 8566A/B analyzer, this command stops the trace. That is not the case with
this the N9061A application.
290
Programming Commands
R1 [one] Illegal Command SRQ
R1 [one]
Illegal Command SRQ
Syntax
R1
;
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The R1 [one] command deactivates all analyzer service requests (SRQs) except SRQ140, the
illegal-command service request.
291
Programming Commands
R2 [two] End-of-Sweep SRQ
R2 [two]
End-of-Sweep SRQ
Syntax
R2
;
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The R2 [two] command activates the end-of-sweep and illegal-command service requests.
292
Programming Commands
R3 [three] Hardware Broken SRQ
R3 [three]
Hardware Broken SRQ
Syntax
R3
;
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The R3 [three] command activates the hardware-broken and illegal-command service requests.
293
Programming Commands
R4 [four] Units-Key-Pressed SRQ
R4 [four]
Units-Key-Pressed SRQ
Syntax
R4
;
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The R4 [four] command activate the units-key-pressed and illegal-command SRQs. Same as RQS 34.
NOTE
294
X-Series analyzers cannot replicate the units-key-pressed service request since no
front panel interaction is supported.
Programming Commands
RB Resolution Bandwidth
RB
Resolution Bandwidth
Syntax
8560 series:
RB
SP
real
SP
HZ
;
KHZ
LF
UP
MHZ
DN
GHZ
AUTO
KZ
MAN
MZ
OA
GZ
CR
SP
,
?
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
RB
SP
real
HZ
KHZ
MHZ
UP
SP
DN
OA
GHZ
KZ
MZ
GZ
?
Preset State:
8560 series: 1 MHz, auto coupled
8566A/B, 8568A/B: 3 MHz, auto coupled
Step Increment: In a 1, 3, 10 series
Preset State: 3 MHz, auto coupled
Step Increment: In a 1, 3, 10 series
295
Programming Commands
RB Resolution Bandwidth
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The RB command specifies the resolution bandwidth. Available bandwidths are 1 Hz, 3 Hz, 10 Hz, 30
Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 3kHz, 30 kHz, 100 kHz, 300 kHz, 1 MHz, and 3 MHz. The resolution bandwidths,
video bandwidths, and sweep time are normally coupled. Executing RB decouples them. Execute CR
(page 134) to re-establish coupling.
NOTE
296
Default values on X-Series analyzers may vary from the legacy analyzers. Refer to
the X-Series User’s and Programmer’s Reference to find out any restrictions that
may apply.
Programming Commands
RBR Resolution Bandwidth to Span Ratio
RBR
Resolution Bandwidth to Span Ratio
Syntax
RBR
SP
SP
real
UP
DN
;
LF
CR
OA
?
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
This command sets the coupling ratio between the frequency span and the resolution bandwidth. It
allows you to set the Span/RBW ratio to 1/<value>, where <value> is set by the user.
297
Programming Commands
RC Recall State
RC
Recall State
Syntax
8560 series:
RC
SP
LAST
;
PWRON
LF
CR
SP
number
SP
,
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
RC
SP
digit
;
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Recalls analyzer state data from the specified state register in the analyzer’s memory.
Registers one through six are reserved for the user, and contain instrument states (such as front panel
configuration) saved with the SAVES command (page 308) or the SV command (page 324).
NOTE
298
The functions of the RC command are identical to the RCLS command (page 299).
Programming Commands
RCLS Recall State
RCLS
Recall State
Syntax
RCLS
SP
LAST
;
PWRON
LF
CR
SP
number
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Recalls analyzer state data from the specified state register in the analyzer’s memory.
Registers one through six are reserved for the user, and contain instrument states (such as front panel
configuration) saved with the SAVES command (page 308) or the SV command (page 324).
NOTE
The functions of the RCLS command are identical to the RC command (page 298).
299
Programming Commands
REV Revision
REV
Revision
Syntax
REV
?
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The REV command returns the firmware revision number.
In X-Series analyzers, this command returns the build date of the N9061A application that you have
installed in your analyzer. The date is returned in YYMMDD format (where YY is the number of years
since 1950, and MM is the month and DD is the date).
300
Programming Commands
RL Reference Level
RL
Reference Level
Syntax
8560 series:
RL
SP
DBM
real
;
DBMV
LF
DBUV
CR
MV
SP
UV
V
SP
UP
MW
DN
UW
OA
W
,
DM
?
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
RL
SP
real
DB
;
DM
SP
UP
MV
DN
UV
OA
?
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Specifies the amplitude level of the top graticule line on the display. This represents the reference level.
301
Programming Commands
RL Reference Level
CAUTION
Signal levels above +30 dBm will damage the analyzer. For a helpful suggestion
on this subject, see Chapter 3 , “Hints and Tips,” on page 71.
NOTE
The 8566A/B and 8568A/B have the reference level from -89.9 dBm to +30 dBm.
The range of reference level for the MXA and PXA is -170 dBm to +30 dBm with
0 dB attanuation). The range of refernce level for EXA is -170 dBm to +23 dBm.
NOTE
If the display line is on, changing the reference level does not adjust the position of
the display line.
302
Programming Commands
RMS Root Mean Square Value
RMS
Root Mean Square Value
Syntax
RMS
SP
TRA
;
TRB
TRC
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The RMS command returns the RMS value of the trace, in display units.
303
Programming Commands
ROFFSET Reference Level Offset
ROFFSET
Reference Level Offset
Syntax
8560 series:
ROFFSET
SP
DB
real
;
LF
UP
SP
DN
CR
?
SP
,
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
ROFFSET
SP
real
DM
;
MV
UV
DB
OA
?
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Offsets all amplitude readouts without affecting the trace.
Once activated, the ROFFSET command displays the amplitude offset on the left side of the screen.
Entering ROFFSET 0 or presetting the analyzer eliminates an amplitude offset.
NOTE
304
For 8566A/B, 8568A/B, the functions of the ROFFSET command are identical to
the KSZ command (page 214).
Programming Commands
RQS Request Service Conditions
RQS
Request Service Conditions
Syntax
RQS
SP
number
;
LF
?
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Sets a bit mask for service requests, each service request has a corresponding bit number and decimal
equivalent of that bit number as shown in the table below.Use the decimal equivalents to set the bit mask.
For example, to set a mask for bits 4 and 5, add the decimal equivalents (16 + 32 = 48), then send the
command RQS 48.
Table 4-26
Bit#
Status Byte Definition
State
Description
6
RQS
Request Service
5
Error Present
4
Command Complete
Any command completed.
2
End of Sweep
Any sweep completed.
1
Message
Display message appears.
0
Trigger
Trigger activated.
7
3
305
Programming Commands
S1[one] Continuous Sweep
S1[one]
Continuous Sweep
Syntax
S1
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The S1 command sets the analyzer to continuous sweep mode. In the continuous sweep mode, the
analyzer takes its next sweep as soon as possible after the current sweep (as long as the trigger conditions
are met). A sweep may temporarily be interrupted by data entries made over the remote interface.
NOTE
306
The functions of the command S1 are identical to the CONTS command
(page 132).
Programming Commands
S2 [two] Single Sweep
S2 [two]
Single Sweep
Syntax
S2
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The S2 command sets the analyzer to single sweep mode. Each subsequent time that the command S2 is
sent, one sweep is started if the trigger conditions are met.
NOTE
The functions of the S2 command are similar to the SNGLS command (page 313).
307
Programming Commands
SAVES Save State
SAVES
Save State
Syntax
SAVES
SP
digit
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Saves the current state of the analyzer in any of the registers one through six.
NOTE
308
The functions of the SAVES command are identical to the SV command
(page 324).
Programming Commands
SER Serial Number
SER
Serial Number
Syntax
SER
?
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
The SER command returns the X-series analyzer serial number to the controller.
309
Programming Commands
SETDATE Set Date
SETDATE
Set Date
Syntax
SETDATE
SP
number
?
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
The SETDATE command sets the date of the real-time clock of the analyzer. The date takes the form
YYMMDD (Year, Month, Day)
310
Programming Commands
SETTIME Set Time
SETTIME
Set Time
Syntax
SETTIME
SP
number
?
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
The SETTIME command sets the date of the real-time clock of the analyzer. The time takes the form
HHMMSS (Hour, Minute, Second).
311
Programming Commands
SMOOTH Smooth Trace
SMOOTH
Smooth Trace
Syntax
SMOOTH
SP
TRA
,
number
of points
;
TRB
TRC
Prerequisite Commands: TS when using trace data.
NOTE
TRA corresponds to Trace 1, TRB corresponds to Trace 2, and TRC corresponds
to Trace 3.
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Smooths the trace according to the number of points specified for the running average.
Each point value is replaced with the average of the values (in measurement units) of the given number
of points centered on it. Increasing the number of points increases smoothing at the cost of decreasing
resolution. If the number of points is an even number, then the number of points is increased by one.
Smoothing decreases at the endpoints.
NOTE
312
Some differences may be noticed between the smoothed trace in the legacy
analyzers and the smoothed trace using the same signal in X-Series analyzers.
Programming Commands
SNGLS Single Sweep
SNGLS
Single Sweep
Syntax
SNGLS
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Sets the analyzer to single-sweep mode. Each time TS (take sweep) is sent, one sweep taken as long as
the trigger conditions are met.
NOTE
The functions of the SNGLS command are identical to the S2 command
(page 307).
313
Programming Commands
SP Frequency Span
SP
Frequency Span
Syntax
8560 series:
SP
SP
real
HZ
;
KHZ
LF
MHZ
CR
GHZ
KZ
MZ
GZ
SP
UP
DN
OA
FULL
ZERO
LAST
?
314
SP
,
Programming Commands
SP Frequency Span
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
SP
SP
real
HZ
;
KHZ
MHZ
GHZ
KZ
MZ
GZ
UP
SP
DN
OA
?
Step Increment: 1, 2, 5, 10 sequence (up to the stop frequency of the analyzer)
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Changes the total displayed frequency range symmetrically about the center frequency.
If resolution and video bandwidths are coupled to the span width, the bandwidths change with the span
width to provide a predetermined level of resolution and noise averaging. Likewise, the sweep time
changes to maintain a calibrated display, if coupled. All of these functions are normally coupled, unless
RB (page 295), VB (page 347), or ST (page 318) have been executed.
315
Programming Commands
SRQ Service Request
SRQ
Service Request
Syntax
SRQ
SP
digit
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The SRQ command sends a service request to the controller when the SRQ operand fits the mask
supplied with the RQS command.
NOTE
316
The N9061A application does not support the setting of bit 1 (units-key-pressed)
of the status byte. Bit-1 of the status byte is always set to Off.
Programming Commands
SS Center Frequency Step Size
SS
Center Frequency Step Size
Syntax
8560 series:
SS
SP
real
;
KHZ
LF
MHZ
UP
SP
HZ
CR
GHZ
DN
SP
KZ
AUTO
MZ
MAN
,
GZ
OA
?
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
SS
SP
real
HZ
;
KHZ
UP
SP
DN
OA
MHZ
GHZ
KZ
MZ
GZ
?
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The SS command specifies center frequency step size.
317
Programming Commands
ST Sweep Time
ST
Sweep Time
Syntax
8560 series:
ST
SP
real
;
MS
LF
US
UP
SP
S
CR
SC
DN
SP
AUTO
,
MAN
OA
?
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
ST
SP
real
SC
;
MS
UP
SP
US
DN
OA
?
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The ST command specifies the time in which the analyzer sweeps the displayed frequency or time span.
NOTE
318
The OA option in the ST command behaves in the same manner as the ST?
command in that it returns the current value to the controller. However, the OA
Programming Commands
ST Sweep Time
option does not set the active function to Sweep Time.
319
Programming Commands
STB Status Byte Query
STB
Status Byte Query
Syntax
STB
?
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
The STB command returns to the controller the decimal equivalent of the bits set in the status byte (see
the RQS (page 305) and SRQ (page 316) commands). STB is equivalent to a serial poll.
320
Programming Commands
STDEV Standard Deviation of Trace Amplitudes
STDEV
Standard Deviation of Trace Amplitudes
Syntax
STDEV
SP
TRA
;
TRB
TRC
Prerequisite Commands: TS when using trace data
NOTE
TRA corresponds to Trace 1, TRB corresponds to Trace 2, and TRC corresponds
to Trace 3.
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Returns the standard deviation of the trace amplitude in display units.
321
Programming Commands
SUM Sum
SUM
Sum
Syntax
8560 Series:
SUM
Sp
TRA
,
?
;
LF
TRB
CR
SP
,
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
SUM
Sp
TRA
,
?
;
LF
TRB
CR
TRC
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Returns the sum of all the trace values to the controller.
NOTE
322
The 8560 series of analyzers returns display units, range (0-610)*601 points or if
Programming Commands
SUM Sum
Trace Data Format (TDF) is set to M, it returns ASCII.
323
Programming Commands
SV Save State
SV
Save State
Syntax
SV
SP
digit
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Saves the current state of the analyzer in any of the registers one through six.
NOTE
324
The functions of the SV command are identical to the SAVES command
(page 308).
Programming Commands
SWPCPL Sweep Couple
SWPCPL
Sweep Couple
Syntax
SWPCPL
SP
SA
;
SR
LF
?
CR
SP
,
The preset value is SA.
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Selects either a stimulus-response (SR) or signal-analyzer (SA) auto-coupled sweep time. In stimulus
response mode, auto-coupled sweep times are usually much faster for swept response measurements.
Stimulus response auto-coupled sweep times are typically valid in stimulus-response measurements
when the system frequency span is less than 20 times the bandwidth of the device under test.
325
Programming Commands
T1 [one] Free Run Trigger
T1 [one]
Free Run Trigger
Syntax
T1
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The T1 [one] command sets the analyzer sweep to free run trigger mode.
NOTE
326
The functions of the T1 [one] command are identical to the TM FREE command
(page 337).
Programming Commands
T2 [two] Line Trigger
T2 [two]
Line Trigger
Syntax
T2
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The T2 [two] command sets the analyzer sweep to line trigger mode.
NOTE
The functions of the T2 [two] command are identical to the TM LINE command
(page 337).
327
Programming Commands
T3 [three] External Trigger
T3 [three]
External Trigger
Syntax
T3
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The T3 [three] command sets the analyzer sweep to external trigger mode.
NOTE
328
The functions of the T3 [three] command are identical to the TM EXT command
(page 337).
Programming Commands
T4 [four] Video Trigger
T4 [four]
Video Trigger
Syntax
T4
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The T4 [four] command sets the analyzer sweep to video trigger mode.
NOTE
The functions of the T4 [four] command are identical to the TM VID command
(page 337).
329
Programming Commands
TA Trace A
TA
Trace A
Syntax
TA
?
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Returns trace A amplitude values from the analyzer to the controller.
The display unit values are transferred in sequential order (from left to right) as seen on the screen.
Display unit values can be transferred to the controller in any one of the four output formats as
determined by the O1 [one] (page 275), O2 [two] (page 276), O3 [three] (page 277) and O4 [four]
commands (page 278).The format of the returned data is also affected by the TDF (Trace Data Format)
(page 332) command and, if TDF B (binary data format) has been selected, by the MDS command
(page 234).
330
Programming Commands
TB Trace B
TB
Trace B
Syntax
TB
?
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Returns trace B amplitude values from the analyzer to the controller.
The display unit values are transferred in sequential order (from left to right) as seen on the screen.
Display unit values can be transferred to the controller in any one of the four output formats as
determined by the O1 [one] (page 275), O2 [two] (page 276), O3 [three] (page 277) and O4 [four]
commands (page 278). The format of the returned data is also affected by the TDF (Trace Data Format)
(page 332) command and, if TDF B (binary data format) has been selected, by the MDS command
(page 234).
331
Programming Commands
TDF Trace Data Format
TDF
Trace Data Format
Syntax
TDF
SP
P
;
A
LF
I
CR
M
B
?
SP
,
The preset value for TDF is P.
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Formats trace information for return to the controller.
The different trace data formats are as follows:
•
M selects the ASCII data format.
•
P selects parameter data format. Numbers are in Hz, Volts, Watts, dBm, dBmV, DBuV, DBV.
•
Specifying A returns data as an A-block data field. The MDS command determines whether data
comprises one or two 8-bit bytes. (See MDS (page 234))
•
Specifying I returns data as an I-block data field. The MDS command determines whether data
comprises one or two 8-bit bytes. (See MDS (page 234))
•
B selects binary data format. The MDS command determines whether data comprises one or two
8-bit bytes
332
Programming Commands
TH Threshold
TH
Threshold
Syntax
8560 series:
TH
SP
real
SP
DM
;
MV
LF
UP
UV
DN
DB
CR
SP
ON
OFF
,
OA
?
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
TH
SP
real
DM
;
MV
SP
UP
UV
DN
DB
OA
?
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The TH command blanks signal responses below the threshold level, similar to a base line clipper. The
threshold level is nine major divisions below the reference level, unless otherwise specified. The UP and
DN commands move the threshold 10 dB.
333
Programming Commands
THE Threshold Enable
THE
Threshold Enable
Syntax
THE
ON
SP
OFF
?
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Turns the threshold on or off.
334
;
Programming Commands
TIMEDATE Time Date
TIMEDATE
Time Date
Syntax
TIMEDATE
SP
number
?
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Sets and returns the date and time of the real-time clock of the analyzer. The number takes the form
YYMMDDHHMMSS (Year, Month, Day, Hour, Minute, Second).
TIMEDATE ON and TIMEDATE OFF commands are supported on some models of the 8560 series.
This set of commands displays or hides the time and date in the graticule. The N9061A application on
the X-series analyzers does not support these commands but accepts them and does not display a CMD
ERR error or CMD NOT SUPPORTED error.
NOTE
This command changes the system clock of the instrument and may invalidate any
time-based licenses installed on the instrument.
335
Programming Commands
TITLE Title
TITLE
Title
Syntax
TITLE
string
delimiter
char
real
string
delimiter
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
The TITLE command activates the screen title mode, enabling you to enter your own title for the screen.
Valid string delimiters which must be used to start and terminate the title are shown below. See 8560
Series User’s Guide for more details.
•
!
•
“
•
$
•
%
•
&
•
‘
•
/
•
:
•
=
•
\
•
~
•
@
336
Programming Commands
TM Trigger Mode
TM
Trigger Mode
Syntax
TM
SP
FREE
;
VID
LF
LINE
CR
EXT
?
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Selects a trigger mode: free, line, video, or external.
NOTE
The functions of the TM command are identical to the T1 (page 326), T2
(page 327), T3 (page 328) and T4 (page 329) commands.
337
Programming Commands
TRA Trace Data Input and Output
TRA
Trace Data Input and Output
Syntax
TRA
?
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The TRA command transfers Trace A amplitude values from the analyzer to the controller. The format
depends on the trace data format selected. See the TDF command (page 332) for details on formatting.
338
Programming Commands
TRB Trace Data Input and Output
TRB
Trace Data Input and Output
Syntax
TRB
?
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The TRB command transfers Trace B amplitude values between the analyzer and the controller. The
format depends on the trace data format selected. See “TDF Trace Data Format” on page 332 for details
on formatting.
339
Programming Commands
TRC Trace Data Input and Output
TRC
Trace Data Input and Output
Syntax
TRC
?
;
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The TRC command transfers Trace Amplitude values from the analyzer to the controller. The format
depends on the trace data format selected. See the TDF command (page 332) for details on formatting.
340
Programming Commands
TRDSP Trace Display
TRDSP
Trace Display
Syntax
TRDSP
SP
TRA
,
ON
TRB
SP
OFF
TRC
;
1
0
?
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Displays a trace or turns it off.
341
Programming Commands
TRIGPOL Trigger Polarity
TRIGPOL
Trigger Polarity
Syntax
TRIGPOL
SP
POS
;
NEG
LF
?
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Selects the edge (positive or negative) of the trigger input that causes the trigger event. TRIGPOL is
available in all trigger modes.
342
Programming Commands
TRSTAT Trace State
TRSTAT
Trace State
Syntax
TRSTAT
?
;
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The TRSTAT command returns trace states to the controller. Valid trace states are Clear-write, Off,
View, Maximum Hold, and Blank.
Table 4-27
Possible Trace States
Trace State
Description
Trace State Data
Returned
Clear-write
CLRW
View
VIEW
Blank
BLANK
Off
No data is returned
Maximum Hold
MXMH
343
Programming Commands
TS Take Sweep
TS
Take Sweep
Syntax
TS
;
LF
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Starts and completes one full sweep before the next command is executed. A TS command is required
for each sweep in the single-sweep mode. TS always restarts a sweep even if a sweep is already in
progress.
344
Programming Commands
VAVG Video Average
VAVG
Video Average
Syntax
8560 series:
VAVG
SP
average
length
SP
UP
;
LF
CR
DN
ON
SP
OFF
,
?
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
VAVG
SP
average
length
SP
ON
;
OFF
?
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Enables the video-averaging function, which averages trace points to smooth the displayed trace. When
queried, the VAVG command returns the number of averages for the 8560 series of analyzers.
345
Programming Commands
VAVG Video Average
NOTE
There are a few differences in the way video averaging works in the N9061A
application compared to the legacy analyzers. See the following table for a
summary of these differences.
Table 4-28
Legacy Analyzers - Video Averaging Behavioral Differences
Condition
Legacy Spectrum Analyzers
N9061A application
All conditions.
8566 and 8568 only - Original
trace is displayed in Trace C.
Only displays the averaged trace.
The averaged trace is displayed
in Trace A.
Average Count value set to 0.
Cannot be set to 0.
Video averaging is turned off if
the Averaging Count is set to 0.
Change in Average Count
setting to a higher value.
8566 and 8568 only Continues counting from
where the previous value left
off.
Resets the counter to zero and
starts the measurement again.
Change in average counter
setting to a lower value.
8566 and 8568 only - Updates
the screen annotation with the
lower averaging value.
If the new count value has not
been reached, continues until the
new lower count has been
reached.
If the new, lower count value has
already been reached, the
analyzer will stop and wait until
you take a new sweep.
Averaging turned on.
Sweep time remains
unchanged.
Sweep time changes due to the
selection of the sample detector.
Change in resolution
bandwidth, video bandwidth,
sweep time, reference level
or attenuation.
8566 and 8568 only - In single
sweep mode, resets counter to
zero and starts the averaging
again.
Continues the measurement
without resetting the counter.
Change in center frequency
or span.
In single sweep mode, resets
counter to zero and starts the
averaging again. 8566 and
8568 only - Also reset the
counter after changes in RBW,
VBW, Sweep Time, Ref. Level
and Attenuation.
In single sweep mode the
X-Series analyzer uses all stored
averages. Does not reset the
counter after changes in RBW,
VBW, Sweep Time, Ref. Level
and Attenuation.
NOTE
346
For 8566A/B, 8568A/B, the functions of the VAVG command are identical to the
KSG (page 193)or KSH command (page 195).
Programming Commands
VB Video Bandwidth
VB
Video Bandwidth
Syntax
8560 series:
VB
SP
real
HZ
;
KHZ
LF
MHZ
UP
SP
CR
GHZ
DN
SP
KZ
AUTO
MZ
MAN
,
GZ
OA
?
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
VB
SP
real
HZ
;
KHZ
MHZ
UP
SP
DN
OA
GHZ
KZ
MZ
GZ
?
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Specifies the video bandwidth, which is a post-detection, low-pass filter.
347
Programming Commands
VB Video Bandwidth
When auto coupled, the video bandwidth is calculated as Resolution Bandwidth x Video Resolution
Bandwidth Ratio. See the VBO command (page 349) for more details.
348
Programming Commands
VBO Video Bandwidth Coupling Offset
VBO
Video Bandwidth Coupling Offset
Syntax
VBO
SP
1
;
-1
0
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The VBO command specifies the relationship between the video and resolution bandwidths which is
maintained when these bandwidths are coupled. The bandwidths are usually coupled unless the RB
command (page 295) or VB command (page 347) have been executed.
•
When 0 is selected, the ratio remains fixed at 1. That is, the resolution bandwidth and the video
bandwidth are always equal
•
When 1 is selected, the video bandwidth is one step higher than the resolution bandwidth. That is, the
video bandwidth:resolution bandwidth ratio is three.
•
When -1 is selected, the video bandwidth is one step lower than the resolution bandwidth. That is, the
video bandwidth:resolution bandwidth ratio is 0.3.
349
Programming Commands
VBR Video Bandwidth to Resolution Bandwidth Ratio
VBR
Video Bandwidth to Resolution Bandwidth Ratio
Syntax
VBR
SP
number
;
SP
UP
LF
DN
CR
OA
?
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
The VBR command specifies the relationship between the video and resolution bandwidths that is
maintained when these bandwidths are coupled.
NOTE
350
VBR uses the legacy signal analyzer settings for video bandwidth only if Mode
Setup > Preferences> Limit RBW/VBW is set to ON.
Programming Commands
VIEW View Trace
VIEW
View Trace
Syntax
8560 series:
VIEW
SP
TRA
;
TRB
LF
CR
SP
,
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
VIEW
SP
TRA
;
TRB
LF
TRC
CR
SP
,
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Displays Trace A or Trace B and stops taking new data into the viewed trace.
NOTE
The functions of the VIEW command are identical to the A3 (page 81) and B3
(page 112) commands. For 8566A/B, 8568A/B, the VIEW command is also
identical to KSj (page 198).
NOTE
TRA corresponds to Trace 1 and TRB corresponds to Trace 2.
351
Programming Commands
VIEW View Trace
For information on the settings of the X-series analyzers when legacy instrument trace settings are sent,
see Table 4-4, “Legacy Products command mapping to X-series for trace/detector settings.”
352
Programming Commands
VTL Video Trigger Level
VTL
Video Trigger Level
Syntax
VTL
SP
number
SP
DB
;
DBM
LF
UP
DBM V
DN
DBUV
MV
UV
CR
SP
,
V
MW
UW
W
DM
?
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
The VTL command sets the signal level that triggers a sweep.
Note that setting a value for VTL sets the trigger mode to VIDEO, even if it was not already set to
VIDEO. (See “TM Trigger Mode” on page 337).
353
Programming Commands
XCH Exchange
XCH
Exchange
Syntax
XCH
SP
TRA
,
TRA
TRB
TRB
TRC
TRC
;
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The XCH command exchanges the contents of the source and destination traces. The traces are analyzed
and adjusted to fit the number of display points on the screen.
NOTE
The functions of the XCH TRA,TRB command are identical to the AXB
(page 109) and EX (page 155) commands.
The functions of the XCH TRB,TRC command are identical to the BXC
(page 118) and KSi (page 197) commands.
354
5
A Brief Introduction to the SCPI
Language
355
A Brief Introduction to the SCPI Language
SCPI Language Basics
SCPI Language Basics
This section is not intended to teach you everything about the SCPI (Standard Commands for
Programmable Instruments) programming language. The SCPI Consortium or IEEE can provide that
level of detailed information.
Topics covered in this chapter include:
•
“Command Keywords and Syntax” on page 356
•
“Creating Valid Commands” on page 356
•
“Special Characters in Commands” on page 357
•
“Parameters in Commands” on page 359
•
“Putting Multiple Commands on the Same Line” on page 361
For more information refer to:
IEEE Standard 488.1-2004, IEEE Standard Digital Interface for Programmable Instrumentation.
New York, NY, 1998.
IEEE Standard 488.2-2004, IEEE Standard Codes, Formats, Protocols and Comment Commands for
Use with ANSI/IEEE Std488.1-1987. New York, NY, 1998.
Command Keywords and Syntax
A typical command is made up of keywords set off by colons. The keywords are followed by parameters
that can be followed by optional units.
Example: SENSe:FREQuency:STARt 1.5 MHZ
The instrument does not distinguish between upper and lower case letters. In the documentation, upper
case letters indicate the short form of the keyword. The lower case letters, indicate the long form of the
keyword. Either form may be used in the command.
Example: Sens:Freq:Star 1.5 mhz
is the same as SENSE:FREQ:start 1.5 MHz
NOTE
The command SENS:FREQU:STAR is not valid because FREQU is neither the
short, nor the long form of the command. Only the short and long forms of the
keywords are allowed in valid commands.
Creating Valid Commands
Commands are not case sensitive and there are often many different ways of writing a particular
356
A Brief Introduction to the SCPI Language
SCPI Language Basics
command. These are examples of valid commands for a given command syntax:
Command Syntax
Sample Valid Commands
[SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution] <freq>
The following sample commands are all identical. They
all cause the same result.
MEASure:SPECtrum[n]?
•
Sense:Band:Res 1700
•
BANDWIDTH:RESOLUTION 1.7e3
•
sens:band 1.7KHZ
•
SENS:band 1.7E3Hz
•
band 1.7kHz
•
bandwidth:RES 1.7e3Hz
•
MEAS:SPEC?
•
Meas:spec?
•
meas:spec3?
The number 3 in the last meas example causes it to
return different results then the commands above it.
See the command description for more information.
[:SENSe]:DETector[:FUNCtion]
NEGative|POSitive|SAMPle
•
DET:FUNC neg
•
Detector:Func Pos
INITiate:CONTinuous ON|OFF|1|0
The sample commands below are identical.
•
INIT:CONT ON
•
init:continuous 1
Special Characters in Commands
Special
Character
Meaning
Example
|
A vertical stroke between
parameters indicates
alternative choices. The effect of
the command is different
depending on which parameter
is selected.
Command:
TRIGger:SOURce
EXTernal|INTernal|LINE
The choices are external, internal,
and line.
Ex: TRIG:SOURCE INT
is one possible command choice.
357
A Brief Introduction to the SCPI Language
SCPI Language Basics
Special
Character
[]
<>
Meaning
Example
A vertical stroke between
keywords indicates identical
effects exist for both keywords.
The command functions the
same for either keyword. Only
one of these keywords is used at
a time.
Command:
SENSe:BANDwidth|BWIDth:
OFFSet
keywords in square brackets are
optional
when composing the
command. These implied
keywords are executed even if
they are omitted.
Command:
[SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolu
tion]:AUTO
Angle brackets around a word,
or words, indicates they are not
to be used literally in the
command. They represent the
needed item.
Command:
SENS:FREQ <freq>
Two identical commands are: Ex1:
SENSE:BWIDTH:OFFSET Ex2:
SENSE:BAND:OFFSET
The following commands are all
valid and have identical effects:
Ex1: bandwidth:auto
Ex2: band:resolution:auto
Ex3: sense:bandwidth:auto
In this command example the word
<freq> should be replaced by an
actual frequency.
Ex: SENS:FREQ 9.7MHz.
{}
358
Parameters in braces can
optionally be used in the
command either not at all, once,
or several times.
Command:
MEASure:BW <freq>{,level}
A valid command is:
meas:BW 6 MHz, 3 dB, 60
dB
A Brief Introduction to the SCPI Language
SCPI Language Basics
Parameters in Commands
There are four basic types of parameters: booleans, keywords, variables and arbitrary block program
data.
OFF|ON|0|1
(Boolean)
This is a two state boolean-type parameter. The numeric value 0 is equivalent to OFF.
Any numeric value other than 0 is equivalent to ON. The numeric values of 0 or 1 are
commonly used in the command instead of OFF or ON. Queries of the parameter
always return a numeric value of 0 or 1.
keyword
The keywords that are allowed for a particular command are defined in the command
syntax description.
Units
Numeric variables may include units. The valid units for a command depend on the
variable type being used. See the following variable descriptions. The indicated
default units are used if no units are sent. Units can follow the numerical value with,
or without, a space.
Variable
A variable can be entered in exponential format as well as standard numeric format.
The appropriate range of the variable and its optional units are defined in the
command description.
The following keywords may also be used in commands, but not all commands allow
keyword variables.
•
DEFault - resets the parameter to its default value.
•
UP - increments the parameter.
•
DOWN - decrements the parameter.
•
MINimum - sets the parameter to the smallest possible value.
•
MAXimum - sets the parameter to the largest possible value.
The numeric value for the function’s MINimum, MAXimum, or DEFault can be
queried by adding the keyword to the command in its query form. The keyword must
be entered following the question mark.
Example query: SENSE:FREQ:CENTER? MAX
359
A Brief Introduction to the SCPI Language
SCPI Language Basics
Variable Parameters
<integer>
is an integer value with no units.
<real>
Is a floating point number with no units.
<freq>
<bandwidth>
<time>
<seconds>
Is a positive rational number followed by optional units. The default unit is Hertz.
Acceptable units include: Hz, kHz, MHz, GHz.
Is a rational number followed by optional units. The default units are seconds.
Acceptable units include: ks, s, ms, us, ns.
<voltage>
Is a rational number followed by optional units. The default units are Volts.
Acceptable units include: V, mV, μV, nV
<current>
Is a rational number followed by optional units. The default units are Amperes.
Acceptable units include: A, mA, μA, nA.
<power>
Is a rational number followed by optional units. The default units are W. Acceptable
units include: mAW, kW, W, mW, μW, nW, pW.
<ampl>
Is a rational number followed by optional units. The default units are dBm.
Acceptable units include: dBm, dBmV, dBμV.
<rel_power>
<rel_ampl>
<percent>
<angle>
<degrees>
Is a positive rational number followed by optional units. The default units are dB.
Acceptable units include: dB.
Is a rational number between 0 and 100. You can either use no units or use PCT.
Is a rational number followed by optional units. The default units are degrees.
Acceptable units include: DEG, RAD.
<string>
Is a series of alpha numeric characters.
<bit_pattern>
Specifies a series of bits rather than a numeric value. The bit series is the binary
representation of a numeric value. There are no units.
Bit patterns are most often specified as hexadecimal numbers, though octal, binary or
decimal numbers may also be used. In the SCPI language these numbers are specified
as:
•
•
•
Hexadecimal, #Hdddd or #hdddd where ‘d’ represents a hexadecimal digit 0 to 9
and ‘a’ to ‘f’. So #h14 can be used instead of the decimal number 20.
Octal, #Odddddd or #odddddd where ‘d’ represents an octal digit 0 to 7. So #o24
can be used instead of the decimal number 20.
Binary, #Bdddddddddddddddd or #bdddddddddddddddd where ‘d’ represents a 1
or 0. So #b10100 can be used instead of the decimal number 20.
Block Program Data
Some parameters consist of a block of data. There are a few standard types of block data. Arbitrary
blocks of program data can also be used.
360
A Brief Introduction to the SCPI Language
SCPI Language Basics
<trace>
Is an array of rational numbers corresponding to displayed trace data. See
FORMat:DATA for information about available data formats.
A SCPI command often refers to a block of current trace data with a variable name
such as: Trace1, TRACE2, or trace3, depending on which trace is being accessed.
<arbitrary block data> Consists of a block of data bytes. The first information sent in the block is an
ASCII header beginning with #. The block is terminated with a semi-colon. The
header can be used to determine how many bytes are in the data block. There are no
units. (You do not get block data if your data type is ASCII, using FORMat:DATA
ASCII command. Your data is comma separated ASCII values.
Block data example: suppose the header is #512320.
•
The first digit in the header (5) tells you how many additional digits/bytes there are
in the header.
•
The 12320 means 12 thousand, 3 hundred, 20 data bytes follow the header.
•
Divide this number of bytes by your current data format (bytes/data point), either 8
(for real,64), or 4 (for real,32). For this example, if you’re using real64 then there
are 1540 points in the block.
Putting Multiple Commands on the Same Line
Multiple commands can be written on the same line, reducing your code space requirement. To do this:
•
Commands must be separated with a semicolon (;).
•
If the commands are in different subsystems, the key word for the new subsystem must be preceded
by a colon (:).
•
If the commands are in the same subsystem, the full hierarchy of the command key words need not be
included. The second command can start at the same key word level as the command that was just
executed.
SCPI Termination and Separator Syntax
All binary trace and response data is terminated with <NL><END>, as defined in Section 8.5 of IEEE
Standard 488.2-1992, IEEE Standard Codes, Formats, Protocols and Common Commands for Use with
ANSI/IEEE Std 488.1-1987. New York, NY, 1992. (Although one intent of SCPI is to be interface
independent, <END> is only defined for IEEE 488 operation.)
361
A Brief Introduction to the SCPI Language
SCPI Language Basics
The following are some examples of good and bad commands. The examples are created from a
theoretical instrument with the simple set of commands indicated below:
[:SENSe]
:POWer
[:RF]
:ATTenuation 40dB
:TRIGger
[:SEQuence]
:EXTernal [1]
:SLOPe
POSitive
[:SENSe]
:FREQuency
:STARt
:POWer
[:RF]
:MIXer
:RANGe
[:UPPer]
Bad Command
Good Command
PWR:ATT 40dB
POW:ATT 40dB
The short form of POWER is POW, not PWR.
FREQ:STAR 30MHz;MIX:RANG
-20dBm
FREQ:STAR
30MHz;POW:MIX:RANG -20dBm
The MIX:RANG command is in the same :SENSE subsystem as FREQ, but executing
the FREQ command puts you back at the SENSE level. You must specify POW to get to
the MIX:RANG command.
FREQ:STAR 30MHz;POW:MIX RANG
-20dBm
FREQ:STAR
30MHz;POW:MIX:RANG -20dBm
MIX and RANG require a colon to separate them.
:POW:ATT 40dB;TRIG:FREQ:STAR
2.3GHz
:POW:ATT 40dB;:FREQ:STAR
2.3GHz
:FREQ:STAR is in the :SENSE subsystem, not the :TRIGGER subsystem.
:POW:ATT?:FREQ:STAR?
:POW:ATT?;:FREQ:STAR?
:POW and FREQ are within the same :SENSE subsystem, but they are two separate
commands, so they should be separated with a semicolon, not a colon.
:POW:ATT -5dB;:FREQ:STAR
10MHz
Attenuation cannot be a negative value.
362
:POW:ATT 5dB;:FREQ:STAR
10MHz
Index
Symbols
?, 279
Numerics
8560E/EC remote language,
8561E/EC remote language,
8562E/EC remote language,
8563E/EC remote language,
8564E/EC remote language,
8565E/EC remote language,
8-bit bytes, 276, 278
29
29
29
29
29
29
A
A minus B
into A, 100, 120
off, 119
plus display line, 101
A plus B
to A, 103, 188
A1, 79
A2, 80
A3, 81
A4, 82
absolute amplitude units, 106
AC coupling, 175
AC/DC, 173, 175
ACPALPHA, 83
ACPALTCH, 84
ACPBRPER, 85
ACPBRWID, 86
ACPBW, 87
ACPCOMPUTE, 88
ACPFRQWT, 89
ACPLOWER, 90
ACPMAX, 91
ACPMEAS, 92
ACPMSTATE, 93
ACPPWRTX, 94
ACPRSLTS, 95
ACPSP, 96
ACPT, 97
ACPUPPER, 98
activate marker, 242
address
display, 138
adjacent channel power
alpha weighting, 83
alternate channels, 84
bandwidth, 87
burst period, 85
burst width, 86
channel spacing, 96
compute, 88
frequency weighting, 89
lower, 90
maximum, 91
measure, 92
measurement results, 95
measurement state, 93
T weighting, 97
total power transmitted, 94
upper, 98
ADJALL, 99
alpha weighting, 83
AMB, 100
AMBPL, 101
amplitude
in dBm, 183
in dBmV, 185
in dBuv, 187
in volts, 189
amplitude marker, 241
amplitude units, 77, 106
analyzer command, 76
angle parameter (variables), 360
ANNOT, 102
annotation, 102
off, 208
on, 209
output trace, 284
APB, 103
arbitrary block data, 361
AT, 104
attenuation, 104
coupling, 121
AUNITS, 106
auto couple, 108
AUTOCPL, 108
average
video, 345
AXB, 109
B
B minus display line, 114
B1, 110
B2, 111
B3, 112
B4, 113
bandwidth
channel power, 128
marker, 243
occupied power, 280
power, 290
resolution, 295
video, 347
video coupling offset, 349
bit_pattern parameter (variables), 360
BL, 114
BLANK, 115
blank
trace C, 200
blank trace, 82, 113, 115
blanking threshold, 333
block data
arbitrary, 361
identifying block size, 361
parsing output, 361
BML, 116
boolean parameter (commands), 359
BTC, 117
BXC, 118
bytes, 276, 278
C
C1, 119
C2, 120
CA, 121
carrier off power, 122
carrier on power, 123
CARROFF, 122
CARRON, 123
center frequency, 124
marker, 148, 244
step size, 317
CF, 124
CHANNEL, 126
channel power, 127
bandwidth, 128
channel selection, 126
CHANPWR, 127
character EOI, 76
characters, 76
CHPWRBW, 128
clear
average, 129
write, 79, 110, 130
Clear Log, 34
CLRAVG, 129
CLRW, 130
Cmd Error, 32, 37
Cmd Error log softkey, 33
command
mnemonic, 76
terminators, 76
commands
boolean parameter, 359
keyword parameter, 359
multiple on a line, 361
parameters, 359
syntax, 356
termination, IEEE, 361
units parameter, 359
valid commands, 356
variable parameter, 359
variable parameter keywords, 359
continuous sweep, 132, 306
CONTS, 132
counter
marker, 247
COUPLE, 133
363
Index
couple
attenuation, 121
auto, 108
frequency
step size, 135
input, 133
resolution bandwidth, 134
sweep time, 136
video bandwidth, 137
couple sweep, 325
coupling
AC/DC, 173, 175
video bandwidth
offset, 349
CR, 134
CS, 135
CT, 136
current units, 77
CV, 137
D
DA, 138
data
arbitrary blocks, 361
data byte, 77
data byte EOI, 77
data entry
hold, 172
data format
display units, 275
one 8-bit byte, 278
real amplitude units, 277
trace, 332
two 8-bit bytes, 276
date, 335
set, 310
DC coupling, 173
degree parameter (variables), 360
delay
sweep, 144
delete
current limit line, 221
delimiter, 77
DELMKBW, 139
delta marker, 229, 245
occupied power bandwidth, 139
step size, 149
DET, 140
detection
mode, 140
negative peak, 190
normal, 184
positive peak, 186
sample, 192
digit, 77
display
address, 138
364
frequency, 158
line, 141
line enable, 143
line off, 215
off, 194
on, 196
read, 146
DL, 141
DLE, 143
DLYSWP, 144
documentation, 19
DONE, 145
done
parsing, 145
dotted lines
optional path, 76
DR, 146
E
E1, 147
E2, 148
E3, 149
E4, 150
EDITDONE, 151
editdone
limit line editing, 151
editing, 151
editing done, 151
elapsed time, 154
end-of-sweep SRQ, 292
ERR, 152
error, 152
errors
clearing, 34
ET, 154
EX, 155
exchange traces, 354
A and B, 109, 155
B and C, 118, 197
excursion
marker peak, 257
external
trigger, 212, 328
external trigger mode, 337
F
FA, 156
fast preselector peak, 161
fast preset, 210
FB, 157
FDSP, 158
FOFFSET, 159
format
display units, 275
one 8-bit byte, 278
real amplitude units, 277
trace data, 332
two 8-bit bytes, 276
FPKA, 161
free run trigger, 326
free trigger mode, 337
FREF, 162
frequency
center, 124
display off, 158
limit line, 219
marker, 246
marker readout, 258
offset, 159, 211
reference, 162
span, 314
start, 156
stop, 157
units, 77
frequency parameter (variables), 360
FS, 163
full span, 163
G
GATE, 166
gate, 166
gate control, 167
gate delay, 168
gate length, 169
gate polarity, 170
GATECTL, 167
GD, 168
getting started, 18
GL, 169
GP, 170
GRAT, 171
graticule, 171
off, 204
on, 206
H
hardware broken SRQ, 293
hardware requirements, 23
HD, 172
hints
compatibility, 72
speed, 72
sweep times, 72
synchronization, 72
hold
data entry, 172
maximum, 271
minimum, 239
HP8566B remote language, 29
HP8568B remote language, 29
I
I1, 173
Index
I2, 175
ID, 177
identify remote language, 177
IEEE command termination, 361
IF adjustment, 99
illegal command SRQ, 291
impedance
units, 77
input
attenuation, 104
coupling, 133
input attenuation, 35
installing N9061A, 25
instrument preset, 178
integer variable (variables), 360
IP, 178
K
keyword parameter (commands), 359
KS(, 181
KS), 182
KS,, 179
KS=, 180
KSA, 183
KSa, 184
KSB, 185
KSb, 186
KSC, 187
KSc, 188
KSD, 189
KSd, 190
KSE, 191
KSe, 192
KSG, 193
KSg, 194
KSH, 195
KSh, 196
KSi, 197
KSj, 198
KSK, 199
KSk, 200
KSL, 201
KSl, 202
KSM, 203
KSm, 204
KSN, 205
KSn, 206
KSO, 207
KSo, 208
KSp, 209
KST, 210
KSV, 211
KSx, 212
KSy, 213
KSZ, 214
L
L0, 215
legacy instrument selection, 29
level
mixer, 267
reference, 301
reference offset, 304
video trigger, 353
LG, 217
licensing, 25
licensing N9061A, 25
LIMF, 219
LIMIFAIL, 220
LIMIPURGE, 221
LIMIREL, 222
limit
lower amplitude, 223
upper amplitude, 225
limit line
delete current, 221
frequency value, 219
relative, 222
limits failed, 220
LIML, 223
LIMTSL, 224
LIMU, 225
line trigger, 327
line trigger mode, 337
linear scale, 226
LN, 226
LO adjustment, 99
LO and IF adjustment, 99
loading N9061A, 25
lock registers, 181
log file, 33
logarithmic scale, 217
logging, 33
lower adjacent channel power, 90
lower-limit amplitude, 223
lsb length, 77
M
M1, 227
M2, 228
M3, 229
M4, 230
MA, 231
marker
activate, 242
amplitude, 241
amplitude output, 231
bandwidth, 243
center frequency, 148, 244
counter resolution, 248
delta, 229, 245
delta step size, 149
frequency, 246
frequency counter, 247
frequency counter off, 232
frequency counter on, 233
frequency output, 238
minimum, 205, 250
next peak, 199
noise, 252
noise off, 201
noise on, 203
normal, 228, 251
occupied power bandwidth, 139
off, 227, 253
peak, 147, 255
peak excursion, 257
position, 254
readout, 258
reference level, 150
span, 207
step size, 149, 262
threshold, 256
time, 263
to center frequency, 148
to reference level, 150, 260
to span, 261
trace, 264
track, 265
track off, 269
track on, 270
type, 266
zoom, 230
marker counter resolution, 180
marker frequency counter off, 232
marker frequency counter on, 233
marker minimum, 205
marker noise off, 201
marker noise on, 203
marker readout, 258
marker readout in frequency, 258
marker span, 207
marker to next peak, 199
marker trace, 264
max mixer level, 35
maximum adjacent channel power, 91
maximum hold, 80, 111, 271
MC0, 232
MC1, 233
MDS, 234
MEAN, 235
mean
power measurement, 236
trace, 235
MEANPWR, 236
MEAS, 237
measurement
data size, 234
MF, 238
MINH, 239
365
Index
minimum
hold, 239
marker, 205, 250
x position, 240
MINPOS, 240
mixer level, 179, 267
MKA, 241
MKACT, 242
MKBW, 243
MKCF, 244
MKD, 245
MKF, 246
MKFC, 247
MKFCR, 248
MKMIN, 250
MKN, 251
MKNOISE, 252
MKOFF, 253
MKP, 254
MKPK, 255
MKPT, 256
MKPX, 257
MKREAD, 258
MKRL, 260
MKSP, 261
MKSS, 262
MKT, 263
MKTRACE, 264
MKTRACK, 265
MKTYPE, 266
ML, 267
mnemonic
command, 76
msb length, 77
MT0, 269
MT1, 270
MXMH, 271
N
N9061A-2FP - installation, 25
negative peak detection, 190
noise
marker, 252
marker off, 201
marker on, 203
measurement, 252
signal to noise ratio, 252
normal
detection, 184
marker, 228, 251
normalize trace data, 272
normalized reference level, 273
normalized reference position, 274
NORMLIZE, 272
NRL, 273
NRPOS, 274
number syntax, 77
366
O
O1, 275
O2, 276
O3, 277
O4, 278
OA, 279
OCCUP, 280
occupied power bandwidth, 280
occupied power bandwidth within delta
marker, 139
offset
frequency, 159, 211
reference level, 214, 304
video bandwidth
coupling, 349
OL, 281
OT, 284
output data, identifying block size, 361
output learn string, 281
output termination, 77
output trace annotations, 284
P
parameter (variables), 360
parameters (commands), 359
parameters, variable, 360
parsing done, 145
peak
excursion marker, 257
marker, 147, 255
negative peak detection, 190
pre-selector, 288
peak position, 286
PEAKS, 285
peaks, 285
percent occupied power bandwidth,
280
percent parameter (variables), 360
phase parameter (variables), 360
PKPOS, 286
PLOT, 287
polarity
trigger, 342
position
minimum x, 240
positive peak detection, 186
power
bandwidth, 290
carrier off, 122
carrier on, 123
channel, 127
percent occupied bandwidth, 280
power measurement
mean, 236
power parameter (variables), 360
PP, 288
pre-selector peak, 288
preset
fast, 210
preset instrument, 178
PRINT, 289
programming
command parameters, 359
command syntax, 356
SCPI basics, 356
valid commands, 356
PWRBW, 290
Q
query
status byte, 320
sweep, 237
R
R1, 291
R2, 292
R3, 293
R4, 294
ratio
VBW/RBW, 350
RB, 134, 295
RBR, 297
RBW to span ratio, 297
RBW/VBW, 35
RC, 298
RCLS, 299
readout
marker, 258
recall last state, 298
recall state, 299
recommended path, 76
reference level, 301
marker to, 150, 260
normalized, 273
offset, 304
reference level offset, 214
reference position
normalized, 274
Refresh log file, 34
relative limit lines, 222
relative power parameter (variables),
360
remote language
8560E/EC, 29
8561E/EC, 29
8562E/EC, 29
8563E/EC, 29
8564E/EC, 29
8565E/EC, 29
HP8566B, 29
HP8568B, 29
selection, 29
repeating syntax element, 76
request service conditions, 305
Index
reserved words, 76
resolution
marker counter, 180, 248
resolution bandwidth, 295
coupling, 134
to span ratio, 297
video bandwidth ratio, 350
results data, identifying block size, 361
returning or storing trace values, 330,
331, 338, 339, 340
REV, 300
revision, 300
RL, 301
RMS, 303
ROFFSET, 304
root mean square value, 303
RQS, 305
rules and limitations, 20
ac/dc coupling, 20
couplings, 21
markers, 21
numeric ranges, 20
parsing, 21
predefined functions, 21
remote control, 20
returning data, 20
supported commands, 22
units, 20
upsupported commands and queries,
22
user-defined functions, 21
S
S1, 306
S2, 307
sample detection, 192
save state, 308, 324
SAVES, 308
saving analyzer state, 281
scale
linear, 226
logarithmic, 217
SCPI commands, 38
SCPI language
basic info, 356
command parameters, 359
command syntax, 356
keyword parameters, 359
valid commands, 356
screen title, 336
display, 336
scrolling log file, 33
secondary keywords, 76
select remote language, 29
selection
channel, 126
send commands, 37
SER, 309
serial number, 309
service and calibration, 40
service request, 316
set
date, 310
RF coupling to AC, 175
RF coupling to DC, 173
time, 311
SETDATE, 310
SETTIME, 311
setting the marker counter resolution,
180
shipment
verification list, 19
signal-to-noise ratio, 252
single sweep, 307, 313
SMOOTH, 312
smooth trace, 312
SNGLS, 313
softkeys
8560 Series, 29
8560E/EC, 29
8561E/EC, 29
8562E/EC, 29
8563E/EC, 29
8564E/EC, 29
8565E/EC, 29
Atten Offset, 35
Clear Log, 34
Cmd Error Log, 33
HP8566B, 29
HP8568B, 29
Limit RBW/VBW, 35
Next Page, 33
Previous Page, 33
Refresh, 34
SP, 314
span, 297, 314
frequency, 314
full, 163
marker, 207, 261
span zoom, 230
special, 76
numbers, 76
SRQ, 316
end-of-sweep, 292
hardware broken, 293
illegal command, 291
units-key-pressed, 294
user-defined, 316
SS, 317
ST, 318
standard deviation of trace amplitudes,
321
start frequency, 156
state
recall, 298, 299
save, 308, 324
trace, 343
status byte query, 320
STB, 320
STDEV, 321
step size
center frequency, 317
marker, 262
stop frequency, 157
string parameter (variables), 360
SUM, 322
sum of traces, 322
SV, 324
sweep
continuous, 132, 306
couple, 325
delay, 144
query, 237
single, 307, 313
take, 344
time, 318
sweep time coupling, 136
SWPCPL, 325
syntax elements, 76
syntax for commands, 76
T
T weighting
adjacent channel power, 97
T1, 326
T2, 327
T3, 328
T4, 329
TA, 330
take sweep, 344
TB, 331
TDF, 332
terminators
command, 76
TH, 333
THE, 334
threshold, 333
marker, 256
threshold enable, 334
time, 335
elapsed, 154
marker, 263
set, 311
units, 77
time date, 335
time parameter (variables), 360
TIMEDATE, 335
time-gating, 166
tips
compatibility, 72
speed, 72
367
Index
sweep times, 72
synchronization, 72
TITLE, 336
title, 336
title mode, 191
TM, 337
TRA, 338
trace
A plus B to A, 188
blank, 82, 115
blank trace C, 200
data format, 332
data I/O, 330, 331, 338, 339
data input, 340
data output, 340
exchange, 354
exchange B and C, 197
mean, 235
output annotations, 284
returning values, 330, 331, 338,
339, 340
smooth, 312
standard deviation of amplitudes,
321
state, 343
storing values, 330, 331, 338, 339,
340
transfer B to C, 202
view, 81, 112
view trace C, 198
trace B minus display line, 116
trace data format, 361
trace data input, 340
trace data input and output, 340
trace data output, 340
trace display, 341
trace marker, 264
track marker, 265
transfer traces
B to C, 117, 202
TRB, 339
TRC, 340
TRCSP, 341
trigger
external, 212, 328
free run, 326
line, 327
mode, 337
polarity, 342
video, 213, 329
video level, 353
triggering the analyzer, 337
TRIGPOL, 342
TRSTAT, 343
TS, 344
turning logging on, 33
TV trigger mode, 337
368
U
units, 77
units parameter (commands), 359
units-key-pressed SRQ, 294
unlock registers, 182
upper adjacent channel power, 98
upper-limit amplitude, 225
URL
signal analyzer updates, 19
user-defined SRQ, 316
V
variable parameter (commands), 359
variables
angle parameter, 360
bit_data parameter, 360
degree parameter, 360
frequency parameter, 360
integer parameter, 360
parameters, 360
percent parameter, 360
phase parameter, 360
power parameter, 360
relative power parameter, 360
string parameter, 360
time parameter, 360
voltage parameter, 360
VAVG, 345
VB, 347
VBO, 349
VBR, 350
VBW/RBW ratio, 350
video average, 345
video averaging
off, 195
on, 193
video bandwidth, 347
coupling, 137
coupling offset, 349
video bandwidth to resolution
bandwidth ratio, 350
video trigger, 213, 329
video trigger level, 353
video trigger mode, 337
VIEW, 351
view
mode, 81, 112
trace, 351
trace C, 198
view trace, 81, 112
view trace, trace
view, 351
voltage parameter (variables), 360
VTL, 353
W
website
firmware updates, 19
X
XCH, 354
Z
zoom marker, 230
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement